JP6690691B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory ( See, for example, Patent Document 1).

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

JP, 2007-7465, A

Here, when a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to be overlapped in the depth direction of the display screen, it is necessary to provide a configuration capable of displaying them satisfactorily, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. There is .

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and when a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the display can be performed well. The purpose is to provide a machine.

The present invention is
Display means having a display screen in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Based on setting the image data in the setting storage unit having a large number of unit setting areas to create drawing data in the setting storage unit and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display unit. Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
Each unit setting area has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value,
A configuration in which the image signal is output by the display control unit so that a brighter color is displayed in a dot corresponding to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical value information,
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen;
Addition processing execution means for executing addition processing for adding numerical information corresponding to respective unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images,
Setting processing execution means for setting the data of the result of the addition processing to a unit setting area corresponding to each of the unit image data overlapping each other in the setting storage means,
Of the back side individual image and the front side individual image displayed so as to be overlapped in the depth direction, numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to a portion overlapping with the front side individual image in the back side individual image is reduced, A reflection reducing unit that does not perform the reduction on the unit image data corresponding to a portion that does not overlap the front side individual image in the back side individual image,
Is equipped with
The reflection reducing unit applies predetermined information corresponding to reducing the numerical information at a predetermined reduction rate to the unit image data of the back side individual image corresponding to a portion overlapping with the front side individual image. Therefore, a unit for reducing the numerical information of the unit image data is provided ,
When performing the reduction on the back side individual image that overlaps with the front side individual image, it is possible to set the reduction rate separately for each unit setting area of the overlapping portion. It is characterized by

When a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, the display can be favorably performed.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display device. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display device. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a winning / winning lottery. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of a memory module. The flowchart which shows the data transfer process performed by a controller. The timing chart which shows the mode of data transfer. The flowchart which shows the main process performed by a display CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process executed by the display CPU. The flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a situation that drawing data is created with execution of drawing processing. The flowchart which shows the hidden surface process using the Z buffer performed by VDP. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for masks performed by a display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of 1st mask display. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 2nd mask display. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for masks performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the operation generation command response process performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the display mode background performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for symbols performed with a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for backgrounds performed by VDP. 9 is a flowchart showing background drawing data creation processing executed by VDP. 7 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for backgrounds performed by a display CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area of VRAM. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data is produced. 7A and 7B are timing charts showing the timing at which drawing data is created. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data is produced. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data is produced. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) connection object. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the connection object performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for connection object production performed by VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object production. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of a memory module. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane used as a calculation object in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that each individual image becomes a control object. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the scrolling background data. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect | action by setting an overlapping area | region. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for scroll backgrounds performed by a display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a division part data setting process executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the background data for small unit groups. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for displacement backgrounds performed by a display CPU. (A)-(e) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition process of the effect image. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the 1st effect production performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for 1st effect production performed by VDP. (A) A flowchart showing a first effect addition process, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining a state of the first effect addition process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing partial addition, (b) The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the 2nd effect production performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for 2nd effect production performed by VDP. (A) A flow chart showing the second effect addition processing, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining the state of the second effect addition processing. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for multiple effect production performed by a display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a setting process for multiple effect effects executed by VDP, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining a combined data area. (A)-(g) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (alpha) data. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for symbols performed with a display CPU. (A) The flowchart which shows the setting process of the symbol sprite data performed by VDP, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a partial display of a symbol is performed. (A)-(h) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating 1st another form. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining 2nd another form, (b) The flowchart which shows the setting process of the symbol sprite data performed by VDP. (A) The flowchart which shows the character transition process performed by VDP, (b)-(f) explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that character transition display is performed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(d) wipe switching production. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for wipe switching effects performed by a display CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing list created when wipe switching production is performed. The flowchart which shows the setting process for wipe switching production performed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(c) wipe switching production. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite for smooth movement, (b), (c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite data for displaying the sprite for smooth movement. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for smooth movements performed by a display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a setting process for smooth movement executed by VDP, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining how the setting process for smooth movement is executed. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of resolution adjustment by a scaler. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for zoom-in production performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for zoom-in production performed by VDP. 9 is a flowchart showing an output process executed by the display circuit. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of zoom-in production. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of moving image data. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by moving image data. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic process for moving images performed by a display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a decoding process by a moving image decoder, and (b) a flowchart showing a moving image setting process executed by a VDP. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for background performed by the display CPU in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions being the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being a support side. A back pack unit is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right sides being the support side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its pivoting front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper working opening 23, a lower working opening 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display portion 33, and a accessory display portion 34 are provided in each opening. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating opening 23, and the lower operating opening 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an outlet 27 is provided at the bottom of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered the various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the outlet 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. The mode which is not performed is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 27, the game ball entering the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also referred to as a prize.

  The upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are open upward. Further, the two working ports 23, 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper working port 23 faces upward. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower working opening 24, and the electric working object 24a is in the open state (supported state or guided state), thereby lowering the working opening. It is possible to win 24 prizes.

  The variable winning device 22 is provided with a big winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an opening / closing door 22b that opens and closes the big winning opening 22a. The opening / closing door 22b is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won or is difficult to win, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be easily won when the player moves to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when the jackpot is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is a mode.

  The main display portion 33 and the accessory display portion 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. On the main display portion 33, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly displayed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper working opening 23 and the winning of the lower working opening 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. The result of the selected internal lottery is clearly displayed on the main display section 33, which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operation opening 23 or the lower operation opening 24 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode.

  The main display unit 33 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a CRT or a dot matrix. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed on the main display portion 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 25 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is displayed as the stop result of the variable display. It is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric hand open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state changes to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variably displays (or variably or switches) a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the drop of the game ball. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols is started based on winning in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times in which the game result is a big hit result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line set in advance in the symbol display device 31.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), a design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are attached to nine types of character designs such as octopus to form the main design.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is equivalent to the "specific symbol", and when the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are equivalent to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. It

  Further, in the case of an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination formed, and thereafter, An explicit video is displayed.

  The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

  Further, based on the winning of any one of the operating ports 23, 24, the variable display is started on the main display section 33 and the symbol display device 31, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. Equivalent to one game.

  At the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 32, a first holding light emitting portion (first holding lamp portion) 35 corresponding to the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is reserved, and the reserved quantity is displayed by turning on the first reserved light emitting section 35.

  A second holding light emitting portion (second holding lamp portion) 36 corresponding to the accessory display portion 34 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 32. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the second holding light emitting unit 36. The functions of each of the hold light emitting units 35 and 36 may be performed by the display in a partial area of the symbol display device 31.

  A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, the guide rail is configured by the rail portion 37, and the guide rail is launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launching handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that allows substantially the entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. Although the window panel is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, the window panel is not limited to this and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner.

  A light emitting means is provided around the window 42. A display light emitting portion 44 is provided above the window portion 42 as a part of the light emitting means. Further, speaker units 45 are provided on the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44 to output a sound effect or the like according to the game state.

  Below the window portion 42 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 which bulge toward the front side are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging part 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from a dispenser, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing the game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In the area of the upper bulging portion 46 that faces the front of the pachinko machine 10, a performance operation device 48 including an operation portion that is manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player to make the effect contents on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 and the like into predetermined effect contents.

  A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, the back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply and a firing control device. Is installed. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main controller 50 is equipped with a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening should be provided to the substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 51 and the like. You may Examples of the trace means include a structure of a joint portion (a caulking portion) that requires inseparable joining of a plurality of case bodies that form a substrate box and requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon the separation, and an adhesive layer that is peeled off to attach an adhesive layer. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that it has been peeled off by being left behind is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. In addition, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box can be considered.

  The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control / calculation unit, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be incorporated as a separate chip, and some functions may be included as separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and firing control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power necessary for each is generated for the main control board 51, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 130 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply / launch control device 57. In this case, the power failure monitoring board monitors the occurrence of the power failure, and when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes the processing for the power failure. It becomes possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, there are detection sensors provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning portion corresponding to the winning portion such as the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper working opening 23, the lower working opening 24 and the through gate 25. This is included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the upper operation mouth 23 and the lower operation mouth 24, and also executes a reach occurrence lottery for each game time and a determination lottery for determining a display duration.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 31, display of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. , Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, jackpot random number counter C1 used in jackpot occurrence lottery, jackpot type counter C2 used in determining jackpot type such as probability variation jackpot result or normal jackpot result, and a symbol Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the display device 31 fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, fluctuations in the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31 A fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower operation port 24 is opened to the electric role is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

  The reserve ball storage area 54b includes a reserve area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and according to the winning history of the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a are stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 occur successively a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1. The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. In addition, the holding area RE is provided with a holding number storage area NA, and in order to specify the number of the holding history of the winning prize for the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 stored in the holding number storage area NA. Information is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display portion 33, and at the start of one game time. Based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, the judgment of win or failure is made.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

  The value of the random number that is a big hit is stored as a win / loss table (win / win information group) in the win / win table storage area as the win / win information group storage means in the ROM 53. As the win / loss table, a win / loss table for low probability mode (low probability win / loss information group) and a win / loss table for high probability mode (high probability win / loss information group) are set. That is, the present pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-probability mode (low-probability state) and the high-probability mode (high-probability state) as the lottery modes in the winning / winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the win / loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the win / loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be won in the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) the bottom after the opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operation port 24.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. The frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (the number of times of high frequency use) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 seconds (high frequency time). ) Has elapsed or until the number of winnings into the special winning opening 22a reaches 10 (the number with high frequency). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (the number of times of low frequency use) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Is continued or until the number of winnings to the special winning opening 22a becomes 6 (the number of low-frequency winnings).

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 41 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the big winning opening 22a once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of times the special winning opening 22a is opened / closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time (or opening limit period) for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. It is optional. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set to be shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, the one time opening is performed. The product of the game cycle of the game ball and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. Further, even if the interval between the game balls is shot and the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 22.

  As a support mode of the lower working port 24 in the electric accessory 24a, when compared in a situation in which the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area, the electric working object 24a in the lower working port 24 is Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is in the open state when the electric-role open state is won is set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening is performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric power open state is won, and when the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, as compared with the low frequency support mode, a short time as a minimum secured time for performing the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be won in the lower working opening 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working opening 23 is higher than in the lower working opening 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working opening 24 is lower than the upper working opening 23. The probability of winning is high. Then, when a prize is given to the lower working opening 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

  In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of being in the electric role open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It is also possible to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in. In addition, a secured time that is secured when one electric lottery opening lottery is performed and the next electric ones open lottery is performed (for example, on the role substance display unit 34 based on the winning of the through gate 25). In the configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display portion 34), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or a condition of any combination is applied. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. And as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result), an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result or a result that suddenly changes to a certain probability), and 15R certainty variation jackpot result (high probability) Corresponding special game result) is set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / winning lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special gaming state).

  The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win / win lottery becomes a big hit state win and the big hit state due to the lottery result. In other words, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot state (the gaming state corresponding to the explicit high probability).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win / win lottery becomes a big hit state win and the big hit state due to the lottery result. In other words, the 15R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the game state to the 15R certainty variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

  The normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means a state in which the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” correspond to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the manner of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage to the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result is the highest, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode. In the support mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, the high-frequency support mode is the high-frequency support mode. As a result, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode, the win / loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode is maintained at the previous modes. The non-explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result (the result of the non-explicit high probability corresponding game result or the latent probability variation state) may be included. In this case, the probability variation jackpot result is further diversified.

  Furthermore, as a kind of the miss result in the win / win lottery, a special miss result which does not occur in the win / win lottery mode and the support mode after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode may be included. . In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the special outlier result are set as described above, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. It is common to be done, but because the transition mode of the win / loss lottery mode is different, for example, when one of the implicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result or special outlier result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display at the game time when the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is the high frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 31 is started, and then the stop display result is derived and displayed. It is a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state in which a special display result is likely to occur.

  Two types of expected effects are set: the reach display and a notice display for expecting the reach display or the special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, so that a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode can be achieved. It includes a display state in which a reach symbol combination that may be established is displayed, and in that state, variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns. In addition, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and displaying the predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, the reach effect is performed. , Which includes reducing or hiding a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

  Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbols, specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbols, on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31, the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is generated. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach patterns in which a corresponding combination of jackpot symbols may be established, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is displayed by the final stop symbol sequence. Is to do.

  Explaining the display contents of FIG. 3 in detail, first, the variable display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and the variable display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach lines are formed, variable display of symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display will be given. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of symbols is ended.

  The notice display is a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, or a part of the symbol columns. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, a background image having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such notice display can occur at both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

  The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game game in which the opening / closing execution mode is entered. Further, in the game time that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main control device 50 but by the sound emission control device 60.

  The variation type counter CS is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used in determining the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) on the main display portion 33 and the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) of the symbol on the symbol display device 31 in the MPU 52. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation display on the main display portion 33 and when the fluctuation display of the symbol by the symbol display device 31 is started. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not the electric accessory 24a is controlled to be in the open state by the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  On the output side of the MPU 52, the payout control device 55 is connected, and the power supply and firing control device 57 is connected. To the payout control device 55, a prize ball command is transmitted, for example, based on the result of the winning determination to the winning-compatible winning portion. The payout control device 55 causes the payout device 56 to perform payout control of prize balls and loan balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply and firing control device 57 based on the operation of the firing handle 41. The power supply and launch control device 57 drives the game ball launching mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

  Further, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52 at each game time. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 24a, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

  Further, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a variable winning award driving unit that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, and an electric auditors product driving unit that opens and closes the electric auditors product 24a of the lower working port 24. . That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. When the electric accessory 24a is in the open state, the MPU 52 controls the driving of the electric accessory driving unit so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed.

  In addition, the voice emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various production commands are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

  Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be briefly described.

  The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progression process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress processing, the normal processing repeatedly executed in the first cycle and the second processing shorter than the first cycle are activated, and are executed by interrupting the normal processing. Although the timer interrupt processing that is set is set, the specific processing configuration is arbitrary as long as the progress of the game can be controlled.

  As a part of the game progressing process, a process of acquiring hold information, a game number control process, a game state transition process, and a demo display process are set. In the process of acquiring the holding information, when the winning information is stored in the holding ball storage area 54b and the holding upper limit number of holding information is not stored in the holding state, when the winning of the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 is detected, the lottery is performed at that time. A process of storing the combination of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the counter buffer 54a as holding information in the holding ball storage area 54b is executed. It It should be noted that the reservation information is stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 in time series, as described above.

  In the game time control process, the data shift process of the reserved ball storage area 54b is performed, provided that the reserved information is reserved and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b, neither in the execution of the game cycle nor in the opening / closing execution mode. Is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Also, when the data shift process is executed, the winning / winning lottery process, the type determination process, and the game number starting process are executed.

  In the winning / winning lottery process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the holding information shifted to the execution area AE and the winning / losing table corresponding to the current winning / winning lottery mode. judge. When the jackpot is won, the type determination process is further executed. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot type counter C2 among the pending information shifted to the execution area AE and the distribution table.

  In the game time start process, whether or not the reach occurs even if the jackpot is not won by referring to the reach table and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information shifted to the execution area AE To judge. Further, in the process for starting the game times, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of the big hit, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the variation type counter CS at the timing are read. The variable display time of the current game is determined from the numerical information. Then, in the game time start process, the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the determined variable display time is started on the main display portion 33, and the command for variation including the information of the variable display time, the presence / absence of the jackpot win, and A type command including the jackpot type information is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

  By the way, the fluctuation display time is determined by reading out the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of a big hit, the type of big hit, and the presence or absence of the reach. It can be said that Further, as will be described later, since the sound emission control device 60 determines the type of reach display according to the variable display time, it can be said that the variation command includes reach type information.

  Further, in the game time control process, the variation display process is executed during execution of the game number, and when the variation display time determined in the variation start process has elapsed, the main display section 33 displays the game number. The variable display of the pattern is ended in a state where the presence or absence of the big hit in and the stop result corresponding to the big hit type are displayed. Further, the end command for instructing the end of the game game is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

  In the game state transition processing, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning have been completed, the transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the opening / closing processing of the special winning opening 22a in the variable winning device 22 is started. It should be noted that various commands for the open / close execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 when the open / close execution mode is started, during the open / close execution mode, and when the open / close execution mode is ended. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the shift of the win / loss lottery mode or the shift of the support mode is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game time that triggered the start of the mode.

  In the process for demonstration display, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for demonstrating without a new game time being started after the game time is ended in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. In addition, since the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for starting the demo is elapsed without the game time being newly started. The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. If it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  The demo display means a start waiting effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 perform a predetermined operation is displayed, but the image is not limited to this, and, for example, the symbol performs a predetermined operation. After the image is displayed, or instead of it, a maker name, a model name, or a moving image of a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demo display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demo display can be diversified.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  The sound emission control device 60, as shown in FIG. 4, includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control / calculation unit, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The operation device 48 for production and the main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, the speaker unit 45, and the display control device 130 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. There is.

  The MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start the game use effect by receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, and executes the game use effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the game use effect, and executes the game use effect ending process. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed. Further, by receiving the command for demo display transmitted from the main controller 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demo display, and executes the demo display process.

  Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

  In the game time production start process, based on both the variation command and the type command, the variation display time grasp process for grasping the variation display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game time and the presence / absence of reach display Reach display grasping process, grasping process of jackpot result occurrence that grasps presence or absence of jackpot result, and jackpot type grasping process that grasps jackpot type when jackpot result occurs. Further, based on the grasp result in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, a symbol for determining the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in this game time. Execute the type grasping process. Then, based on the result of each grasping process, a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designating command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed, the display control device. To 130.

  In addition, in the game reproduction effect starting process, in addition to the above-described grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for performing a notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type of lottery for displaying the notice is also executed. Then, in the case where the advance notice display has been generated, the advance notice command including the information of the type of the advance notice display is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  Further, in the game round effect starting process, the display light emitting table for game round and the voice table for game round are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing result of each of the above processes. The display light emission table for game times defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the course of progress of the corresponding game time. In addition, the voice table for game times defines the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the corresponding game times.

  In the game game effect ending process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game time are ended. Further, in the game turning effect ending process, an end command including information for ending the game turning effect is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In the jackpot performance process, based on the received various commands for jackpot performance, it grasps the production mode at the time of opening, each round, between each round, and ending, and the jackpot performance corresponding to the grasped result. Is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the big hit effect and the sound table for the big hit effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the big hit effect. Stipulate.

  In the demo display process, the presentation mode of the demo display is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the voice table for demo display are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emission unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the demo display. Stipulate.

  The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is not limited to the above processing, but includes processing for controlling the light emission of the first holding light emitting unit 35 and the second holding light emitting unit 36. included.

  Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the effect operation device 48 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the effect operation device 48 based on the operation unit of the effect operation device 48 being operated. Then, the operation corresponding process is executed. Further, even when the operated state is released, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal and the operation corresponding process is executed.

  Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, an effect such that the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 is shifted to a different position on the two-dimensional plane is executed. A plurality of positions, specifically, two positions are set as the shiftable positions. Correspondingly, the operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is provided as, for example, a cross key or an operation lever rotatable in a plurality of directions so that these plural positions can be individually designated. An operation signal corresponding to each operation is transmitted from the device 48. In the operation handling process, the operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and the operation generation command including the information that the effect operation device 48 has been operated and the operation mode information is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, in the operation handling process, when the operation of the operation unit is released, an operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, in the operation handling process, in addition to the transmission of the above command, the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 are specified so as to correspond to the operation of the performance operation device 48. .

<Display control device 130>
The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. More specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 via the input port 137. To be done. Note that the reception of a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the voice emission control device 60, and includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board. Be done.

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via the bus, and based on the command received from the voice light emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 133 is stored in the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via the bus, and based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 31 to display a 3D image. The memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134 and the VDP 135 will be described below.

  The memory module 133 pre-stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data, and also pre-stores various image data (image information) for displaying a 3D image. It is a storage means. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes image data for objects such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for texture attached to the object, and one frame worth. Image data for the back surface that constitutes the rearmost image.

  Here, the object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system (world space), which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Is. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. Since the surface model is applied to the image data for the object, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates preset for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (that is, the direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

  The texture is an image to be attached to each polygon of the object, and by attaching the texture to the object, an image corresponding to the object, for example, a display image including a design or a character is generated. The method of holding the image data for texture is arbitrary, but for example, it includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is.

  The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image. The way in which the image data for the back side is held is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

  The work RAM 132 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 133 and transferred, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to the DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 131 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 134 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to the SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is well executed. The VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the timing of executing the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144, and a mode buffer 145, the details of which will be described later.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. It is a kind of drawing circuit for operating the image processing device 31b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 135 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 135 should be called a microcomputer chip containing a drawing-specific firmware.

  More specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and the I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. The geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after the object is arranged in the world coordinate system. Then, finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display screen G.

  The rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes the texture on each clipped object based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, and determines the appearance of the object. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object on a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on depth information to perform one-frame drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, in a frame buffer. 142. The drawing data for one frame means the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is incorporated in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are included. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 133. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of the frame areas 142a and 142b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, in the situation where drawing on the symbol display device 31 is being executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

  The display circuit 155 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 through the connected output port 138. More specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 31, and converted into gradation data. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

  Further, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode. The predetermined process will be described later.

<Specific configuration of memory module 133>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 133 will be described.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module 133. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory module 133 is configured by packaging the controller 161 and the NAND flash memory 162 into one package.

  The NAND flash memory 162 is provided with a memory cell array, and in the memory cell array, in order to display an image on the symbol display device 31 and a control program area 163 in which the control program data of the display CPU 131 is stored. An image data area 164 storing image data to be used is provided.

  The image data area 164 is an object storage area 165 that stores image data for an object, a texture storage area 166 that stores image data for a texture, and a back image storage area that stores image data for a back surface. 167 and. The object storage area 165 is provided with a connected object storage area 165a in which image data for connected objects is stored. The connected object will be described in detail later.

  The controller 161 has a main body side I / F 171 that transmits and receives data to and from the display CPU 131 that is a transfer instruction source and the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 that is a data transfer destination, and a storage side I that transmits and receives data to and from the NAND flash memory 162. / F172, a controller CPU 173, a control ROM 174 and a control RAM 175, which are control units that perform data control processing in the controller 161 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 162, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU 173. A transfer execution circuit 176 that reads data from the memory 162, a cache memory 177 that temporarily stores the data read by the transfer execution circuit 176, and a NAND flash memory. An error correction circuit 178 performs correction of the read error detection and the detected errors in the data from the 162, and a.

  Generally, the NAND flash memory 162 is used while avoiding a block including a defect in the memory cell array. The presence / absence and location of this defective block differ depending on the individual. Therefore, the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 needs to be associated with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 162, and the association is performed by the controller CPU 173.

  Specifically, the control ROM 174 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates a logical address with the address of each page of the physical block. The addressing command received from the display CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the addressing buffer of the control RAM 175. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 175, the controller CPU 173 reads the address management table from the control ROM 174 and grasps the address of the page of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, the controller CPU 173 issues a transfer instruction to the transfer execution circuit 176, and the transfer execution circuit 176 transfers the data so that the data of the physical address according to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. The process is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 177 is transferred to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134.

  Incidentally, as the control ROM 174, a randomly accessible memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory is used. Further, as the cache memory 177, one having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of the NAND flash memory 162 is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and, more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to the DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

  Further, the memory module 133 is provided with a boot memory 179 in which boot data for initial activation in the display CPU 131 is stored in advance. As the boot memory 179, a mask ROM is used so that random access is possible, and the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when comparing data read of the same capacity. It is used. The boot memory 179 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is higher than that of the NAND flash memory 162, and an internal power supply such as a battery. It may be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit equipped with.

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 179 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 162. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same as, substantially the same as, or similar to the storage capacity for one page in the NAND flash memory 162. Boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 179, and when the processing at the time of initial startup is executed in the display CPU 131, data is booted from the boot memory 179 rather than from the NAND flash memory 162. Is read. As the boot data for the initial activation, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 and an instruction code for transferring the data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134 are set.

  Here, the data transfer processing executed by the controller 161 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 7. The data transfer process is activated when an unprocessed address designation command is stored in the control RAM 175.

  First, in step S101, it is determined whether or not the addressing this time relates to access to the boot memory 179. If the access is to the boot memory 179, the process of transferring the boot data of the boot memory 179 to the display CPU 131 is executed in step S102, and then this data transfer process is ended. As a result, the boot data is read from the display CPU 131.

  On the other hand, if it is not related to access to the boot memory 179 (step S101: NO), that is, if it is related to access to the NAND flash memory 162, the process proceeds to step S103. Incidentally, as will be described in detail later, the execution timing of the transfer instruction in this case is a timing before the timing when the program data and the image data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 are necessary in the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135. Is set to complete the transfer to the VRAM 134.

  In step S103, it is determined whether or not the target address is for predictive transfer. The target address of the predictive transfer refers to a physical address corresponding to a logical address for one page following the logical address when the logical address for one page is designated by the display CPU 131.

  When it is not the target address of the predictive transfer (step S103: NO), in step S104, the physical address corresponding to the logical address to be designated this time is grasped using the address management table. By this processing, even in the configuration using the NAND flash memory 162 in which a defective block is likely to occur at the time of writing data, it is possible to favorably associate the physical address with the logical address.

  In subsequent step S105, the controller CPU 173 issues a transfer instruction to the transfer execution circuit 176 so that the data stored at the grasped physical address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. As a result, the transfer of the data to the cache memory 177 is started.

  In a succeeding step S106, it is determined whether or not the transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, the data transfer instruction related to the target address of the predictive transfer is executed in step S107. As a result, in the transfer execution circuit 176, transfer of the data stored in the cache memory 177 of the data stored in the physical address corresponding to the logical address consecutive to the logical address of the data which has been transferred immediately before is started.

  In this case, the cache memory 177 has a storage capacity capable of simultaneously storing data for a plurality of pages, specifically, two pages. Then, in the transfer execution circuit 176, when the data related to the target address of the predictive transfer is transferred to the cache memory 177, the data of the immediately preceding address which triggered the prediction and which has already been transferred to the cache memory 177. The data related to the target address of the predictive transfer is transferred so as not to be erased, that is, to the area different from the area in which the data is stored. This makes it possible to prevent the data being transferred from the cache memory 177 to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134 from being erased during the transfer of the data related to the target address of the predictive transfer.

  In a succeeding step S108, a process of transferring the data, which has been determined to be transferred to the cache memory 177 in the step S106, to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134 which is set as a transfer destination target is executed. In this case, when transmitting the address designation command, the display CPU 131 transmits the RAM of the data transfer destination and the information of the transfer destination address in addition to the address designation command or as another command. Therefore, in step S108, the data is transferred to the transfer destination address in the designated transfer destination RAM.

  Then, in step S109, it is determined whether or not the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer destination target is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the data transfer to the transfer destination target is completed (step S109: YES), this data transfer process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S103 that the current address designation is related to the target address of the predictive transfer, the process proceeds to step S106 without executing the processes of steps S104 and S105. Then, when the transfer of the data related to the address designation to the cache memory 177 is completed (step S106: YES), the processes of steps S107 to S109 are executed, and the present data transfer process is ended.

  The state of data transfer will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 8A shows how data is transferred from the boot memory 179, FIG. 8A shows a read request from the display CPU 131, and FIG. 8B shows data read from the boot memory 179. It is a state of data transfer. Further, FIG. 8B shows how the data in the NAND flash memory 162 is transferred, FIG. 8C shows a read request from the display CPU 131, and FIG. FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer to the memory 177, and FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer from the cache memory 177.

  First, a case where data is transferred from the boot memory 179 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 131 at the timing of t1, and the reception of the address designation command is recognized by the controller CPU 173 at the timing of t2.

  After that, at the timing of t3, the controller CPU 173 recognizes that the boot data of the boot memory 179 is designated as the read target, and the data transfer from the boot memory 179 is started. In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 131 in the controller CPU 173 to the start of the data transfer is T1. After that, the data transfer is completed at the timing of t4.

  Next, a case where data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the display CPU 131 transmits an addressing command at the timing of t5, and the controller CPU 173 recognizes the reception of the addressing command at the timing of t6.

  After that, at the timing of t7, the controller CPU 173 recognizes that the data of the NAND flash memory 162 is designated as the read target, and also the physical address corresponding to the designated logical address. In the transfer execution circuit 116, pages corresponding to the physical address are sequentially recognized, and data transfer to the cache memory 177 is started. In this case, the recognition of the physical address corresponding to the logical address and the sequential recognition instead of the random access are performed, so that the period T2 from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 is from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3. It is longer than the period T1.

  Then, at the timing of t8, the data transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, so that the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer destination RAM is started. In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 131 in the controller CPU 173 to the start of the data transfer to the transfer destination RAM is T3, and the data transfer from the boot memory 179 is performed. It is longer than the period T1 required until the start.

  After that, at the timing of t9 during the data transfer to the RAM, the transfer of the data corresponding to the target address of the predictive transfer to the cache memory 177 is started. In this case, in the controller CPU 173, the physical addresses corresponding to the consecutive logical addresses may be designated by the transfer execution circuit 176, so that the address of the defective block may be interposed between the physical addresses corresponding to the consecutive logical addresses. Even if it is, by associating these continuities in advance, the time required for recognizing the physical address can be shortened as compared with the case of recognizing the physical address from the address designation command. An image data group for executing a predetermined effect such as super reach display is stored over a plurality of physical blocks.

  Thereafter, at timing t10, the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer destination RAM is completed. Then, a new addressing command is transmitted from the display CPU 131. Incidentally, the NOR flash memory is provided with an address terminal and a data input / output terminal separately, but the memory module 133 having the NAND flash memory 162 has the specifications of an address terminal and a data input / output terminal. Are not provided separately. Therefore, after the data is transferred from the cache memory 177, the address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 131.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the transfer of the data related to the predictive transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, and at the timing of t12, the controller CPU 173 recognizes the reception of the new addressing command from the display CPU 131. Since the logical address designated by the address designating command corresponds to the logical address of the data targeted for the predictive transfer, the cache memory for the data targeted for the predictive transfer at the subsequent timing t13. The transfer from 177 to the transfer destination RAM is started.

  In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 131 in the controller CPU 173 to the start of the data transfer is T4. As described above, the data related to the predictive transfer is started during the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM, and its start timing is before the read request from the display CPU 131 is made. It has become the timing of. Therefore, the period T4 is shorter than the period T3 required until the data transfer is started when the data is read from the NAND flash memory 162 without the predictive transfer. Incidentally, although the period T4 is shorter than the period T1 required until the data transfer from the boot memory 179 is started, the period T4 is not limited to this and may be longer than the period T1. Thereafter, at timing t14, the transfer of the data related to the predictive transfer is completed.

  If the data transfer related to the predictive transfer is continuous, the period required until the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM is started in response to the read request from the display CPU 131 is T4. Will be continuous. On the other hand, when the logical address of the data related to the predictive transfer does not match the logical address related to the read request from the display CPU 131, the period required until the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM is started is T3. Data is transferred in the following manner.

  As described above, since the NAND flash memory 162 is used as a memory for storing the control program data and the image data in advance, it is possible to increase the capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. You can Further, by using the NAND flash memory 162, rewriting can be repeatedly performed in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and development cost can be suppressed. Also, it can be recycled. In particular, the control program data and the image data are not stored in separate memories, but both data are stored in a single memory module 133, thereby making the transfer path with the display CPU 131 compact. You can

  However, the NAND flash memory 162 has a lower data transfer rate than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 179, which requires a higher reading speed than the NAND flash memory 162, and thus the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 131 can quickly start the process for initial activation. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial activation is stored in the NAND flash memory 162, the control in the display CPU 131 can be started smoothly.

  Further, the data whose logical addresses are continuous with respect to the data designated as the transfer target from the display CPU 131 is set as the data related to the predictive transfer, and one page of data is transferred from the cache memory 177 to the transfer target RAM. Data relating to the predicted transfer is pre-transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177 using the period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for data transfer of pages having consecutive logical addresses. Then, the display CPU 131 reads out the program data transferred in advance to the work RAM 132 and executes the processing, and the VDP 135 reads out the image data transferred in advance to the VRAM 134 and executes the processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a data transfer waiting time from occurring, and each process can be smoothly advanced.

  The NAND flash memory 162 and the boot memory 179 are packaged as a memory module 133 in one package, and the controller CPU 173 manages data reading from the memories 163 and 179. Thus, the display CPU 131 may send an addressing command to the controller CPU 173 regardless of whether the data transfer is performed from the NAND flash memory 162 or the boot memory 179. This simplifies the configuration of the signal path related to the transmission of the command. Further, in the memory module 133, the portions that receive commands from the display CPU 131 are concentrated in the I / F 171, so that the configuration of the signal path can be simplified also from this point.

  Incidentally, the NAND flash memory 162 needs to input a write command signal to the WE terminal when reading data, but the controller 161 pulls up the HWE (HOST WRITE ENABLE) terminal to which the write command signal is externally input. However, since the FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal of the controller 161 is connected to the WE terminal of the NAND flash memory 162, it is impossible to input a write command signal from the outside of the controller 161. A pseudo write command signal is input to the flash memory 162. Therefore, it is possible to favorably read the data from the NAND flash memory 162, while preventing unauthorized modification of the data of the NAND flash memory 162.

<Development Buffer 141 of Work RAM 132 and VRAM 134>
Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 133 will be described.

  First, the work RAM 132 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the work RAM 132 has a power supply to itself while the situation in which the transferred data may be used even after being used once is continued. A regular area 132a for storing and holding while the supply is continued, and a changing area 132b to be overwritten when transferring other data after use are provided.

  Program data necessary for advancing main processing, V interrupt processing, command interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, are written in the regular area 132a. By providing the common area 132a, it is possible to smoothly start the main process, the V interrupt process, the command interrupt process, and the like that are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

  When it becomes necessary to temporarily store data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 132b, all or part of the data in the common area 132a is not impaired in the smooth execution of processing in the display CPU 131. May be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary for the data to be returned to the common area 132a by the start of the corresponding process.

  Program data necessary to execute a subroutine activated as necessary in each of these processes is written in the change area 132b. Further, program data necessary for a subroutine to be executed next may be transferred to the change area 132b while the predetermined subroutine is being executed. It is done so as not to erase. By providing the change area 132b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in the configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 132 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  By the way, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, the work RAM 132 is not supplied with backup power. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 132 is erased or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be described.

  To the expansion buffer 141, specifically, the power supply to the self is continued while the transferred image data may be used even after being used once. During use, a regular area 141a for storing and holding and a changing area 141b that is overwritten when other image data is transferred after use are provided.

  Image data for an object, image data for a texture, and image data for a back surface used when starting the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 31 are written in the regular area 141a, and a predetermined illegal operation is performed. The abnormality notification data used when displaying the abnormality notification image when an abnormality is detected is written. Since the common area 141a is provided, even if the drawing instruction is suddenly issued from the display CPU 131, the VDP 135 can access the common area 141a and satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction. it can.

  When it becomes necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 141b, all or one of the regular areas 141a is within a range that does not hinder the smooth image display on the symbol display device 31. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the data of the copy is temporarily deleted. In this case, the restoration of the image data to the common area 141a needs to be performed by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

  Image data for an object, image data for a texture, image data for a back surface, and the like are written in the change area 141b. Further, the image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 141b while the predetermined effect is being executed, but the transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect being executed. Not done. By providing the changing area 141b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 141 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 134. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the VRAM 134 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

<Basic processing in display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, a main process that is started when supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

  In the main process, first, in step S201, an initial setting process is executed. In the initial setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, first, in step S301, a boot data transfer request is issued to the memory module 133. That is, an address indicating the boot memory 179 is written in the area first referred to in the address map of the display CPU 131, and the address designation command is transmitted to the memory module 133 based on the information.

  Then, in step S302, it is determined whether or not the boot data has been read, and the determination process is repeated until the read is completed. When the reading of the boot data is completed, the initialization process is executed in step S303. As the initialization process, the registers of the display CPU 131, the register 153 of the VDP 135, the work RAM 132, and the VRAM 134 are initialized.

  In a succeeding step S304, the transfer of the latter half data for initial setting is requested. In other words, the program data for initial setting consists of the data for initial startup that constitutes the first half of the data and the data for the latter half that follows it, and the data for initial startup is set in the boot data. There is. Then, in the initial starting data, a read instruction of the latter half data is set. In this way, by storing only the data from the beginning to the middle of the initial setting program data as boot data in the boot memory 179 in advance, it is possible to suppress the amount of data to be stored in the boot memory 179. Accordingly, the storage capacity of the boot memory 179 can be suppressed.

  By the way, if the entire program data for initial setting is regarded as boot data, the data stored in advance in the boot memory 179 can be regarded as initial program data, and the data in the latter half part is referred to as second program data. I can see it.

  In a succeeding step S305, a scaler initial adjustment process of the display circuit 155 is executed. In the initial adjustment processing, when the image signal is output based on the drawing data created in each of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output corresponding to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As described above, the resolution initial adjustment command (resolution initial adjustment information) is transmitted to the VDP 135. This initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the boot data as a resolution initial adjustment command.

  By sending the resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 135, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the scaler resolution adjustment area in the register 153 of the VDP 135. Accordingly, when the image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

  In a succeeding step S306, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the latter half data to the change area 132b of the work RAM 132 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. It should be noted that the transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the latter half of the data are set so that the standby time in step S306 becomes as short as possible or substantially not occur. When the transfer of the latter half data is completed, the process proceeds to step S307.

  Incidentally, the processing from step S301 to step S306 is executed based on the boot data stored in advance in the boot memory 179, and the processing from step S307 to step S314 is executed based on the latter half data.

  In step S307, a transfer request for the initial image data is issued to the memory module 133. Here, the initial image data is the minimum image data for displaying an image related to the system test on the symbol display device 31, and the variable display of the symbol is performed on the display screen G before the predetermined background image. The data capacity is set smaller than the image data required for displaying the demo image and the image data required for displaying the demo image. The initial image data is not simply 3D image data, but a combination of 2D still image data and plate polygon image data.

  Further, the image related to the system test is an image for confirming that the symbol display device 31 is normal in the manufacturing factory of the pachinko machine 10 or in the game hall, for example, a red image on the entire surface of the display screen G. Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an image in which a plurality of colors are divided and displayed, or an image in which the manufacturer name and model name of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The memory module 133 receives the addressing command corresponding to the initial image data from the display CPU 131, and thereby starts the transfer of the initial image data to the change area 141b in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134.

  In a succeeding step S308, a background color initial adjustment process is executed. In the initial adjustment process, the ground color initial adjustment command (ground color initial adjustment) is issued to the VDP 135 so that the numerical information set as the initial value in the unit area of each frame area 142a, 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes the initial numerical information. Information). This initial numerical value information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the latter half data as a ground color initial adjustment command.

  The VDP 135 stores the initial numerical value information in the area for ground color adjustment in the register 153 of the VDP 135 by transmitting the ground color initial adjustment command. As a result, the background color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas where the initial numerical value information was not updated when the drawing data was created. Although black is set as the initial ground color in the pachinko machine 10, it is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  In a succeeding step S309, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the initial image data to the VRAM 134 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. It should be noted that the transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the initial image data are set so that the standby time in step S309 is as short as possible or practically does not occur. When the transfer of the initial image data is completed, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, a transfer request for the regular program data is issued to the memory module 133. As described above, the regular program data includes the program data necessary for advancing the processes after step S201 and the various interrupt processes in the main process. The memory module 133 starts the transfer of the regular program data to the regular area 132a of the work RAM 132 by receiving the addressing command corresponding to the regular program data from the display CPU 131.

  In a succeeding step S311, a task process for an initial image is executed. In the task process, a process of grasping various parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 135 to display the initial image is executed. As various parameters, specifically, the address information of the area to which the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 134, the information of the frame areas 142a and 142b in the mode in which the drawing data should be created using the initial image data, the geometry calculation unit 151, and The rendering unit 152 includes information for creating drawing data corresponding to the initial image from the initial image data.

  In a succeeding step S312, a drawing list is created as drawing instruction information including information corresponding to the processing result of the task processing in the step S311, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In the VDP 135, drawing data corresponding to an initial image is created in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b according to the drawing list, and an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. As a result, the display of the initial image is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The display of the initial image is continued until the drawing list is newly transmitted from the display CPU 131 and the image is updated by the VDP 135. By displaying the initial image in this manner, the display of the image on the display screen G is started at an earlier timing than the configuration in which no image is displayed on the display screen G until the display of the game image is started. can do.

  In a succeeding step S313, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular program data to the work RAM 132 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the regular program data are set so that the standby time in step S313 is as short as possible or practically does not occur. When the transfer of the regular program data is completed, the process proceeds to step S314.

  In step S314, a transfer request for the regular image data is issued to the memory module 133. Then, the initial setting process is ended. The regular image data includes the image data for the back surface used when starting the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 31, and the image data for the object and the texture for displaying the symbols. Contains image data. The image data for displaying the back surface and the image data for displaying the pattern are set corresponding to the types of the display modes, but the regular image data includes the image data for both display modes. Further, the abnormality notification data used when displaying the abnormality notification image when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected is included. The abnormality notification data is used for 2D still image data and plate polygon. It is a combination with image data of.

  Here, when the main processing is started in the display CPU 131 by executing the initial setting processing as described above, (1) boot program data and start-up program data including the latter half data, ( The 2) initial image data, (3) regular program data, and (4) regular image data are transferred from the memory module 133. In this case, the data is transferred in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4). In addition, the processing of steps S302, S306, S309, and S313 is executed, so that the transfer timing of each data does not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to favorably transfer the above-mentioned respective data.

  Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 9), after executing the initial setting processing in step S201, various interrupts are permitted in step S202. This allows the display CPU 131 to execute the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. After that, in the main process, the process of step S202 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interruption process will be described.

  The command interruption process is a process that is activated with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the sound emission control device 60, whatever the process is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, the command received at the input port 137 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the change area 132b of the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that a command is newly received is transferred to the corresponding area. set. After that, the command interrupt processing is terminated, and the processing before the start of the command interrupt processing is restored.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

  When the VDP 135 outputs the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner portion of the display screen G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the aligned dots, and the image signals are sequentially output to the dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display screen G. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 131 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

  In the V interrupt process, first, in step S401, a command analysis process is executed. Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 is analyzed. In the following step S402, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received, based on the analysis result of step S401. If a new command has been received, command corresponding processing is executed in step S403.

  In the command handling process, the data table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is grasped. The data table defines the processing required to display an image for one frame at each image update timing when a moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. It is an information group.

  Here, as the commands that the display CPU 131 receives from the sound emission control device 60, there are a fluctuation pattern command, a symbol designating command, and a notice command, as already described. When these commands are received, the data table necessary for executing the game rendition corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 31 is grasped. Further, as the command to be received, there is an end command, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for finally stopping the currently playing game diversion effect is grasped. Further, as the command to be received, there are various commands for jackpot performance, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the jackpot performance is grasped. Further, as the command to be received, there is a command for demo display, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the demo display is grasped. Further, other program data necessary for executing the processing based on the data table which is grasped as necessary is grasped.

  Of the data tables necessary for executing the game turning effect, the data table necessary for starting the game turning effect has already been transferred to the working area 132a of the work RAM 132 as the working program data. In addition, the data table required to stop the game reproductive effect, the data table required to start the jackpot effect, and the data table required to execute the demo display are also used as regular program data in the work RAM 132. It has already been transferred to the area 132a. Further, other program data necessary for executing the processing based on those data tables has already been transferred to the regular area 132a of the work RAM 132 as regular program data.

  After executing the command handling process in step S403, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the pre-transfer of the program data is necessary. The data determined to be necessary here is the data table not included in the regular program data among the data tables determined to be necessary in step S403, and the data table necessary for executing the processing based on the data table. Other program data.

  If the program data needs to be transferred in advance, a request to transfer the necessary program data is issued to the memory module 133 in step S405. The memory module 133 starts the transfer of the program data to the change area 132b of the work RAM 132 by receiving the address designation command corresponding to the program data from the display CPU 131.

  That is, when a new command is received, the display CPU 131 determines whether or not new program data needs to be transferred at the timing of analysis of the command, and if necessary, makes a program data transfer request. Thereby, the pre-transfer of the program data can be started at the earliest possible timing. Incidentally, at the time of this transfer request, not only the logical address in which the program data to be transferred is stored, but also the transfer destination address is specified. In addition, since the data table and program data including the processing of the first timing when executing the processing corresponding to the command are transferred as the normal program data at the initial startup, the processing corresponding to that after receiving the command There is no waiting time before it starts.

  If a negative determination is made in step S402, a negative determination is made in step S404, or after the processing of step S405 is executed, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update processing, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. As a result, it becomes possible for the display CPU 131 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In the following step S407, task processing is executed. In the task process, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, the parameters necessary for issuing a drawing instruction to the VDP 135 are calculated. Details of the task processing will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S408, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 135 creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 135 will be described in detail later.

  In a succeeding step S409, it is determined whether or not program data is being transferred. If the program data is being transferred, the V interrupt process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the program data is not being transferred, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the transfer of the image data is necessary by referring to the information set as the update timing after the current state in the currently set data table. To determine.

  Of the various image data, the image data used when drawing an instruction based on the regular program data is set as regular image data. In other words, as the regular image data, the image data required to start the game reproducible effect, the image data required to start the jackpot effect, and the image data required to execute the demo display are set. . These image data transfer requests have already been made to the memory module 133 in the initial setting processing (FIG. 10), and when the display CPU 131 receives a command, the transfer is completed.

  Note that the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that at least the processing in and after step S406 is not executed until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. In this case, after the main process (FIG. 9) is activated in the display CPU 131 and the initial image is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the initial image is continuously displayed until the transfer of the common image data is completed. Becomes Further, when transferring the initial image data, the simple pattern data having a data capacity smaller than the total data capacity of the image data required for variable display of the pattern is also transferred at the same time, and the transfer of the common image data group is completed. When the fluctuation pattern command is received in a situation where it is not, a fluctuation display by a simple symbol may be performed.

  The image data that is determined to be required to be transferred in step S410 is the image data that is required at the update timing after the current state in the currently set data table and is not included in the regular image data. Is. If the transfer of the image data is not necessary, this V interrupt processing is ended as it is. If it is necessary to transfer the image data, in step S411, the transfer request of the necessary image data is issued to the memory module 133, and then the V interrupt process is ended. The memory module 133 receives the address designation command corresponding to the image data from the display CPU 131, and thereby starts the transfer of the image data to the change area 141b of the expansion buffer 141.

  That is, the display CPU 131 refers to the currently set data table to determine whether or not new image data needs to be transferred, and if necessary, makes a transfer request for image data, and creates drawing data in the VDP 135. Make sure that the image data has been transferred in advance by the time required for the operation. This allows the VDP 135 to smoothly create drawing data. Incidentally, at the time of this transfer request, not only the logical address in which the image data to be transferred is stored, but also the transfer destination address is specified. Further, since the common image data is transferred at the time of initial activation, there is no waiting time from the reception of the command to the start of displaying the image corresponding thereto.

  Here, by executing the process of step S409, the transfer of the program data is prioritized over the transfer of the image data. Even if the transfer of the program data is prioritized in this way, the transfer of the image data is determined by referring to the data table even if the transfer is once avoided in step S409. In the subsequent V interrupt processing, the necessity of the transfer is determined and the transfer request is executed. As a result, the transfer timings of the program data and the image data can be prevented from overlapping, and the transfer of the program data can be prioritized.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the task process, first, in step S501, a setting process for control start is executed. In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for which the control (calculation) is newly started in the display CPU 131 at the current processing time is executed. An individual image is a 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface or a 3D image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. That is.

  Regarding the setting process for control start, specifically, first, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing time. If it exists, the change area 132b of the work RAM 132 is searched for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the individual image grasped as the control start target is searched. Reserve a free buffer area so that there is a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the initialization processing is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the control start parameters are set in the initialized free buffer areas according to the individual image.

  In the following step S502, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in one frame of images after the current processing.

  In a succeeding step S503, background arithmetic processing is executed. In the background calculation process, for the background image that forms the background image and the background character, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, the rotation angle, the scale, the light information for adding the contrast, and the projection A process for calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information for performing and a Z test designation is executed.

  In a succeeding step S504, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

  In a succeeding step S505, a symbol calculation process is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for the image of the symbol which is the object of variable display in each game.

  By the way, in each process of step S503 to step S505, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S501 is executed. In addition, in each processing of step S503 to step S505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing comes. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162 and is transferred to the work RAM 132 in advance by the time when it needs to be read by the display CPU 131.

  After that, in step S506, the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task process is ended. In the grasping process of the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images which are the control update targets by the respective processes of steps S503 to S505. To execute. The grasping is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same, and in this case, the process of step S506 is executed. There is no need.

  In the setting process for control start in step S501, the control start timing of each individual image may be set in a dispersed manner so as to disperse the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Basic processing in VDP135>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the content of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, is set for the image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as the image data handled by the VDP 135, the presence or absence of decoding designation and the information of the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set in the header information. Good.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system at the time of creating the drawing data this time are set, and further information on the drawing order of each image data, The parameter information of each image data is set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serially-numbered numerical information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 13A, the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the effect object A is set as the m-th, the effect object B is set as the m + 1-th, and so on. There is. Further, as the order after the image data for these effects, the image data for symbols is set, for example, the object A for symbols is set as the nth, the object for symbols B is set as the n + 1th, and so on. There is.

  Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1) ,. Has multiple types of parameters set. Regarding the parameter P (1) of the image data for the back side, specifically, as shown in FIG. 13B, the information of the address of the area to which the image data for the back side is transferred in the VRAM 134 and the image for the back side. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the data, and in the world coordinate system when setting the back image data The rotation angle information that indicates the rotation angle, and the scale information that indicates the magnification when setting the world coordinate system for the scale that is set as the initial state of the back image data, and the back image data Information of a uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) in the case of setting is set.

  Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all pixels of the image data for the object. Further, this coordinate information is set for the image data for the object, but is not set for the image data for the texture. In the texture image data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each pixel of the object image data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in a state of being attached to a combination of object image data and texture image data. There is. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when performing texture mapping.

  Further, the parameter (P1) includes camera information including coordinate and orientation information of the virtual camera when the back-side image data is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for rendering, and the back-side image data is rendered. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case of performing.

  Further, in the parameter (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of hidden surface erasing method, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is a method in which, when many objects or two-dimensional images are overlapped in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel) arranged on the Z-axis is viewed from the viewpoint. Is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is sequentially set to corresponding unit areas in the frame areas 142a and 142b. When applying the Z buffer method, the Z buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

  In addition to the Z-buffer method, the Z-sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to and the addition processing as already described or the processing for fusion operation as already described is executed as necessary. The Rukoto. Although description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, it is activated when an effect image is displayed.

  Further, the parameter (P1) is created for displaying the background image, the α data designation information indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the application target, the fog designation information indicating whether or not the fog is applied and the application target. The separate-save designation information indicating whether or not the drawing data for the background image is separately saved is set.

  Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of designating the uniform α value and a method of designating the α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of 2D still image data or texture image data, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the image data for the same texture. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

  By setting the uniform α value and the α data as described above, the transparency of 2D still image data or image data for texture is not controlled finely on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but is uniform for all pixels. In the situation where it is sufficient to control, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

  The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog and the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a fixed manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, if a fog similar to other objects is applied to an object arranged on the back side in the Z-axis direction, and a texture is not obtained due to being too dark, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. This makes it possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

  In addition, the separate saving means that the drawing data for the background image once created is written and saved in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b in order to use it as it is in the subsequent frames. Say. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode buffer 145 and a second mode buffer 145 so as to correspond to the respective display modes in a one-to-one correspondence. The specific content of this separate storage will be described later in detail.

  In addition, in other parameters such as the parameter P (2), as shown in FIG. 13C, the information of the object is replaced with the information of the image data for the background among the various information of FIG. 13B. Texture information and is set. As this information, information on the address of the area to which the object or texture is transferred is set.

  Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created as the drawing process is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S602.

  In the setting process for the background, out of the image data designated in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back face for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the character object are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, the initialization processing of that area is executed. After that, the VRAM134 grasps and reads the address to which the image data is transferred in advance, and at the same time, the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data is set so that the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale are designated in the drawing list. The world conversion processing for converting the coordinate values of the world coordinate system is executed to set the buffer area secured above.

  If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. Further, in the background setting process, a control ending process is executed to erase the background image data not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In a succeeding step S603, effect setting processing is executed. In the setting process for effect, an object for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the drawing list this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If they are not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control ending process is executed to delete the image data for effect that is not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  In a succeeding step S604, a symbol setting process is executed. In the design setting process, the object for displaying the design is grasped in the image data designated in the drawing list this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If they are not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control ending process is executed to erase the image data for symbols not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  By executing the processes of steps S602 to S604, as shown in FIG. 15, the drawing list specifies the placement target in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales that are also designated by the drawing list is completed. Note that FIG. 15 simply shows a state in which the rearmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged.

  In the following step S605, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint are determined based on the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin of the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 15, the viewpoint PC 31 shown by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the backmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 15 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In a succeeding step S606, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion processing into the visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In the following step S607, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S606 is recognized with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in that state, the space corresponding to the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 15) corresponding to the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b (that is, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31) is extracted as a reference in step S606. Clip each clipped individual image.

  In a succeeding step S608, a lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and the shadow, reflection, etc. of each object extracted by the clipping process are calculated based on the virtual light source. .

  In a succeeding step S609, texture mapping processing is executed. In the texture mapping process, the textures corresponding to the respective objects extracted by the clipping process are pasted to determine the appearance of each object. This texture mapping process includes processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping, in addition to the process of simply pasting image data for texture.

  Then, in steps S610 to S612, the individual images extracted in step S607 and further subjected to the lighting process and the texture mapping process are projected onto the screen area PC32 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection). Drawing data is created by performing projection.

  Specifically, first, in step S610, a background drawing data creation process is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the background, the drawing data for the background is created by projecting the background image and the object set as the background image onto the screen area PC32 while performing hidden surface removal.

  Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 4, and a background buffer in which background drawing data is written and a drawing data for effect are written in the screen buffer 144. The effect buffer and the design buffer into which the drawing data for the design is written are set. An area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC32 is set in the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the symbol buffer. The background drawing data created in step S610 is written in the background buffer. If the image data for the background is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the background is not created.

  In a succeeding step S611, rendering data creation processing for effect is executed. In the rendering data creation process for rendering, the object set as the rendering image is projected onto the screen area PC32 while erasing the hidden surface, so that the rendering buffer is used for rendering in the screen buffer 144. Create drawing data. If the rendering image data is not specified in the rendering list, the rendering data for rendering is not created.

  In a succeeding step S612, drawing data creation processing for symbols is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the symbol, the object set as the symbol is projected onto the screen area PC32 while the hidden surface is erased, thereby drawing the symbol in the buffer for symbols in the screen buffer 144. Create the data. If the drawing image data is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the design is not created.

  Then, in step S613, the drawing data combining process is executed, and then the present drawing process is ended. In the drawing data synthesizing process of step S613, the drawing data for background, the drawing data for effect, and the drawing data for design, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of steps S610 to S612, are generated. After composition, the composition result is written in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b as one frame of drawing data.

  In this case, the drawing data for the background → the drawing data for the effect → the drawing data for the pattern are specified to be lined up from the back side to the front side, and further, it is set so that the images do not overlap in the depth direction. ing. Therefore, in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b, first, the drawing data for the background is written, then the drawing data for the effect is written, and finally the drawing data for the symbol is written. At this time, when the α value of complete transparency is set for the pixel for which drawing is performed, the image on the back side is used as it is, and when the α value of semi-transparency is set, the α value is changed. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the standard ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. Then, the fusion operation as described above is executed.

  By the way, each drawing data is specified to have an area for one frame, but the alpha value of complete transparency is set for the blank part that is not projected in the drawing data for production and the drawing data for design. Has been done.

  The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the generation of drawing data for one frame after the frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

  The above steps S602 to S607 are the processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and the above steps S608 to S613 are the processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  As described above, the Z buffer 143 is used when hidden surface removal is performed by the Z buffer method. Here, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is started in each drawing data creation process of steps S610 to S612 in the drawing process (FIG. 14) when the Z test is designated in the drawing list. Further, when the Z test is designated, the display CPU 131 sets the camera information of each individual image that is the target of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so that each viewpoint has the same coordinates and orientation. The viewpoint is set so as to be in the Z-axis direction of the world coordinate system. Therefore, the Z axis of the screen area PC32, which is a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer, is set to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. Further, only one Z buffer 143 is set, and it has an area having the same number of dots as the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 144.

  First, in step S701, an individual image included on the Z axis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 15) is set as a reference, and the target pixel of the individual image that is the test target this time is selected. Understand the set Z value. In a succeeding step S702, the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the drawing target dot in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S703, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in the step S701 corresponds to the front side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in the step S702. If it corresponds to the front side, the process proceeds to step S704, and the Z value grasped in step S701 is overwritten in the dot area referred to in step S702 in the Z buffer 143. In the following step S705, the numerical information for drawing such as the color information set in the pixel referred to in step S701 is overwritten in the area of the current projection target dot in the drawing target buffer of the screen buffer 144. Then, it progresses to step S706.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S703 that the front side is not supported, the process proceeds to step S706 without executing the processes of steps S704 to S705. That is, when the Z value of the pixel that is the test target is the same as the Z value that has already been set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or is on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. At the same time, the numerical information for drawing that has already been set is retained as it is. On the other hand, if the Z value of the pixel that is the test target is on the front side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. , Numerical information for drawing is also updated.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S701 and the Z test is performed on a new target pixel.

  If the Z test is completed for all the dots in the screen area PC32, it is determined in step S707. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S708, and then the process returns to step S701 to perform the Z test on the new projection target dot. If it is completed, this hidden surface processing is ended.

  By performing the hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are lined up on the Z axis, only the individual image close to the viewpoint is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, masking (that is, partial display) of the character for the background is executed by using the hidden surface processing. Then, this mask is performed by setting the Z value of the object for the mask in the display CPU 131.

  The masking calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the mask calculation process is the same as the effect calculation process of step S504 in the task process (FIG. 12) when it is indicated in the data table that the mask calculation process should be executed in the referenced area. Is executed.

  First, in step S801, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display. Here, the first mask display and the second mask display are set as the mask display. The first mask display is a display mode in which a state in which a character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is in a state in which the entire character is displayed and pixels to be masked are displayed in a plurality of frames. It is a display mode that gradually increases over time and finally disappears.

  If it corresponds to the first mask display, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table in step S802. In a succeeding step S803, a pixel to be masked is grasped in the object grasped in the step S802 based on the currently set data table.

  After that, the Z value setting process is executed in step S804, and then the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, the pixels that are masked in the object are set so that the Z value is on the back side of the backmost image, and the pixels that are not masked are The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position that should be originally displayed, which is on the front side of the rearmost image.

  The masking arithmetic process is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, whereby the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface process in the VDP 135. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 16) is executed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of description, the 3D image is shown as a 2D image in FIG. 18.

  FIG. 18A shows a case where the character CH10 is displayed as usual without performing the first mask display. 18 (a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated in the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 18 (a-2) is the display screen G. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-1), the Z value is set for each pixel so that it is on the front side of the backmost image, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-2). The entire character CH10 is displayed.

  FIG. 18B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. 18 (b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 18 (b-2) is the display screen G. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (b-1), the Z value is set so that some of the pixels are on the front side of the image on the back surface, but the remaining pixels are on the back surface. The Z value is set so as to be on the back side of the image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18 (b-2), the character CH10 is displayed only at the portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so as to be on the near side.

  A plurality of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH10 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of first mask display modes for the same character CH10.

  Returning to the description of the calculation process for masking (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S801 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second masking time. Since it means that the display is supported, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second mask display, based on the currently set data table.

  If it is the start timing, in step S806, the mask target object is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S807, the dedicated table for mask is read out based on the currently set data table. The mask dedicated table is stored and held until the second mask display this time is completed. In a succeeding step S808, the pixel set as the initial erasing target in the mask dedicated table is grasped.

  After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S809, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the above-mentioned object, for the pixel recognized as the initial deletion target in step S808, the Z value is set so as to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and the pixel is set as the initial deletion target. For the pixels that are not formed, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position on the front side of the rearmost image and should be originally displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the erase target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the following step S811, the data corresponding to the value of the erase target counter updated in step S810 is confirmed in the currently read dedicated mask table, and the pixel to be erased is grasped.

  After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S812, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the object, the pixel that is recognized as the deletion target in step S811 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the rearmost image, and is the deletion target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to correspond to a position on the front side of the rearmost image and which should be originally displayed.

  The masking arithmetic process is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, whereby the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface process in the VDP 135. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 16) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, for convenience of description, the 3D image is shown as a 2D image in FIG. 19.

  FIG. 19A shows an image diagram of the information set in the mask dedicated table, and FIG. 19B shows the case where the character CH11 is displayed as usual without the second mask display. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 19A, the object PC 34 corresponding to the character CH11 has a plurality of pixels, and in the mask dedicated table, the plurality of pixels are grouped into a plurality of groups and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the frame order to be erased is set. Specifically, the group shown as “Z1” is set as the initial deletion target, and thereafter, the group shown as “Z2” → the group shown as “Z3” → the group shown as “Z4” → shown as “Z5” It becomes a deletion target in the order of the group.

  In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group shown as “Z1” is the deletion target, as shown in FIG. 19C, the pixel portion corresponding to the group of “Z1” is missing. The character CH11 is displayed. Further, in the subsequent frame, when the group indicated as “Z2” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 19D, in addition to the group of “Z1”, the pixel corresponding to the group of “Z2” is added. The character CH11 is displayed with the part missing. Then, the character CH11 is not displayed in the frame in which the group finally indicated as "Z5" is the deletion target.

  As described above, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask an object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required to store the image data.

  Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without significantly increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131. Further, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can exhibit the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, a Z value on the back side of the backmost image is set in the hidden portion. The rearmost image is an image that always forms the rear surface in any frame, and thus serves as an absolute reference as a position on the Z axis (depth direction). By setting the Z value of the part to be hidden based on this, it becomes possible to make the setting mode of the Z value in the case of non-display uniform, and the process related to the setting of the Z value. The processing load can be reduced.

  Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. Further, in the second mask display, instead of erasing every plural pixels, the erasing may be performed for each pixel, and the erasing target pixel may be set as the display target again. May be

  Further, by performing the Z value setting in reverse, the characters are not sequentially erased over the display period for a plurality of frames, but are displayed so that the characters sequentially appear over the display period for a plurality of frames. It may be configured to be.

<Another form of mask processing using the Z buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another form of the masking arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether it is the start timing, based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, in step S902, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S903, based on the currently set data table, the initial setting is performed. Read the mask table.

  In a succeeding step S904, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, the numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and the information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S903. .

  The lottery counter is configured to be updated each time the process of step S202 is executed in the main process (FIG. 9), for example, and when the counter value makes one round, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be. Further, in the initial masking table, the information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased is all the pixels constituting the object to be masked. Among them, a plurality of pixels are set as one group and each group has a one-to-one correspondence.

  In the following step S905, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S904. After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S906, the present calculation process is ended. In this Z value setting processing, in the above-mentioned object, the Z value of the pixel recognized as the deletion target in step S905 is set to be on the back side of the backmost image, and is set as the deletion target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to correspond to a position on the front side of the rearmost image and which should be originally displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S901 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, the mask table is rewritten so that the erase target information already set as the erase target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the erase target is rewritten so that the counter value is redundantly assigned to the other information to be erased. This allocation may be performed randomly, or may be configured to be allocated to the information to be erased corresponding to the counter value of the immediately lower order on the table.

  Thereafter, the mask table rewritten in step S907 is used to execute the processing in steps S904 to S906, and then the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

  As described above, according to this another mode, the pixels to be erased are randomly selected, so that the mask display mode can be diversified.

  The mask display using the Z buffer 143 may be applied not to the background character but to the effect character or the design. For example, when applied to a character for production, the hidden surface processing is executed collectively for the image data for the background and the image data for the presentation, so that the backmost surface is processed in the same manner as the above-mentioned configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed based on the Z value of the image. In addition, when applied to the design, the hidden surface processing is executed collectively for the background image data, the effect image data, and the image data for the design, so that the same as the above configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

  Further, even when the hidden surface processing is individually performed on the background, the effect, and the design, it is determined that the pixel for which the Z value on the inner side of the rearmost image in the VDP 135 is set is not the drawing target. If so, the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed with reference to the Z value of the backmost image, as in the above configuration.

  In addition, the Z values of the display target and the non-display target are not distributed based on the Z value of the backmost image, but a Z value in front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target. The Z value on the far side from the viewpoint may be set as the Z value to be displayed.

  The hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not based on the Z axis of the world coordinate system but based on the direction in which the viewpoint is directed.

  Further, in the configuration for displaying a 2D image as in the second embodiment described below, when the VDP is configured to be able to operate drawing data in pixel units, information in the depth direction set for each pixel of image data is displayed. The image may be partially displayed by allocating it to either target information or non-display target information.

<Structure for switching display modes>
Next, a configuration relating to switching of display modes will be described.

  The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game time is started and the type of the game time image displayed when the game time is being executed are set to a predetermined type, and a plurality of types The display mode of is set. Specifically, the first display mode and the second display mode are set.

  The display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, when comparing the symbols with the same number, the outer shapes and shapes of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and the patterns are different. Regarding the background image, the type of the backmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and types of characters displayed in front of the backmost image are different. The number of characters to be displayed is set to be larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

  The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Specifically, the display mode can be sequentially switched by operating the effect operation device 48 in a situation where the game time and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, switching is performed based on the operation device 48 for effect being operated under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game game is being executed.

  A specific processing configuration for switching the display mode will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the operation generation command handling process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation occurrence command handling process is executed by the command handling process of step S403 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the sound emission control device 60. If it has not been received, this operation command handling process is terminated, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1002.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether it is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1002, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, the first switch execution flag is set in a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1003.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process proceeds to step S1004, and it is determined whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in the situation where the game game is being executed. Specifically, when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started → high-speed variable display in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → low-speed variation It includes a display flow of sequentially stopping each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of variable display of symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to the timing at which high-speed variable display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 ends.

  In addition, the mode of variable display of the symbols, start the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → acceleration period of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → high-speed variable display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (high speed is constant The display flow may be a sequential stop of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 via a speed) → low speed fluctuation display (low speed is a constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be the period during which the high-speed variable display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is being executed.

  Further, a medium speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. That is, the mode of variable display of the symbols is arbitrary as long as it is switched in a plurality of stages such as 2 stages, 3 stages or 4 stages or more. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of a stage of low discrimination in which the player's symbol discriminating property is low among the stages.

  Further, in the flow of the variable display of the symbols, the specific variable mode is arbitrary as long as it includes the state of the variable display in the relatively low identification mode → the variable display in the high identification mode, for example, any mode. Even though the fluctuation speed is the same, in the variable display in the low identification mode the symbol is displayed in a transparent, semi-transparent, hollow or partially removed state, and in the variable display in the high identification mode the entire symbol is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be the period during which the variable display is performed in the low identification mode.

  The information for specifying whether it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1004, it is determined whether it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is determined that it is not in the second switchable period, the operation corresponding to the operation generation command is ended as it is, and if it is in the second switchable period, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1005. The second switching execution flag is set for.

  After performing the processing of either step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, the display mode counter is updated.

  The display mode counter is a counter for the display CPU 131 to specify the current display mode, and is provided in the work RAM 132. The counter value for the display mode is set in correspondence with each display mode in a one-to-one correspondence. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as described above, a numerical value of “0” corresponding to the first display mode and the second display mode are set as the counter value. The numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the counter for the display mode is set as “0”, the first value is set when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. 1 display mode is set.

  In step S1006, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order each time the effect operation device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S1006 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is “0” and the first display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to “1” and the second is set. When the process of step S1006 is executed in the situation where the display mode counter is "1" and the second display mode is set while switching to the display mode, the display mode counter is set to "1". 1 Switch to display mode. After the process of step S1006 is executed, the process corresponding to the operation occurrence command is ended.

  Next, the calculation processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The display mode background calculation process is executed by the background calculation process of step S503 in the task process (FIG. 12). When performing a jackpot effect, the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, so the calculation processing for the display mode background is not executed, and when the standby image is displayed or when the game time effect is executed. The calculation processing for the display mode background is executed.

  First, in step S1101, the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referenced to determine whether or not the display mode is the first display mode. In the case of the first display mode, in step S1102, the first rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1103, various parameters of the grasped first backmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S1104, an object corresponding to the first display mode, which is an object to be updated for the background, is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1105, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

  On the other hand, in the second display mode, in step S1106, the second rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1107, various parameters of the grasped second backmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the following step S1108, the object corresponding to the second display mode, which is the object to be updated for the background, is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1109, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

  Note that at the execution timing of the process of step S1102, the control start setting process (step S501) for the first background image and the background object corresponding to the first display mode is completed. Further, at the execution timing of the process of step S1106, the setting process for starting control (step S501) for the background object corresponding to the second backmost image and the second display mode is completed.

  After executing the process of step S1105 or step S1109, it is determined in step S1110 whether the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any of the switching execution flags is set, it is determined in step S1111 whether the processing load is large.

  A situation where the processing load is large means that the processing load of the VDP 135 is large or the processing load is large enough to cause processing omission when both the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the rendering list this time are executed by the VDP 135. This is a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 135 is relatively large even if the drop does not occur. Information regarding whether or not the processing load is large is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1111 is performed based on the information.

  When the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S1112 whether the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been separately saved. Here, the separate storage means that the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually saved and the saved state is maintained. For another storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

  In the mode buffer 145, in order to display the first mode area 145a in which drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to the first display mode and the background image corresponding to the second display mode are displayed. A second mode area 145b in which drawing data for the background is written. In addition, the VDP 135 has a function of writing the drawing data for the background into either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and reading the written background drawing data into the screen buffer 144. A display mode control unit 154 having a writing function is provided.

  If it has not been separately saved, the execution designation information of separately saved is stored in step S1113, and then this operation processing is ended. If it is already saved separately, this operation processing is ended as it is.

  When the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the background display corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data of is set. When the process of step S1113 is being executed, the separately designated execution designation information is set. The separately-storing execution designation information includes information indicating that the separately-storing should be performed, and also includes information on the address of the separately-storing destination.

  On the other hand, when the processing load is large (step S1111: YES), it is determined in step S1114 whether the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has been separately saved. If it has not been stored separately, this operation processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has already been stored separately, in step S1115, the use designation information of the separately stored data is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

  When the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the background display corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data of is set. When the process of step S1115 is being executed, the use designation information of the separate storage data is set. The separate storage data use designation information includes information indicating that the separate storage data should be used, and also includes information on the address where the separate storage data is stored.

  Next, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S505 of the task process (FIG. 12).

  First, in step S1201, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the control update process for the symbol. The case where the jackpot effect is executed is included as a case where it is not necessary to execute, and the case where the effect for game play is executed and the case where the standby image is displayed are included as a case where it is necessary to execute. If it is not necessary to execute, the symbol calculation processing is ended as it is, and if it is necessary to execute, in step S1202, based on the currently set data table, is the game time being executed? Determine whether or not.

  If the game time is not being executed, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If the first switching execution flag is set, in step S1204, the symbol to be controlled is changed corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, while holding the information for the parameters of each free buffer area secured for controlling the symbols in the work RAM 132 as they are, only the information on the symbols to be controlled (for example, the information of the transfer destination address) Is rewritten to information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. Note that the processes of steps S1203 and S1204 may be configured to be executed by the control start setting process (step S501) in the task process (FIG. 12). In addition, when a positive determination is made in step S1203, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203 or the processing of step S1204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S1206, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process, the image data for the pattern corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set.

  When the game times are being executed (step S1202: YES), in step S1207, based on the currently set data table, whether or not high speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. judge. When the high speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, it is determined in step S1208 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

  When the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 14) corresponding to the drawing list this time is executed by the VDP 135 and the pattern to be controlled is changed in correspondence with the display mode of the switching destination, a process omission occurs. Based on whether or not the processing omission occurs, it can be changed, and if the processing omission occurs, it is determined that it cannot be changed.

  For example, when the background image data corresponding to the switching of the display mode is newly set in the drawing list this time, it is necessary to newly set the image data to the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. The processing load on the VDP 135 increases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol cannot be changed. On the other hand, when another saved data is set as the image data for the background in the drawing list this time, or when the image data for the background corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set. In this case, since it is not necessary to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the design can be changed.

  It should be noted that the information as to whether or not it can be changed is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1209 is performed based on that information. Further, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1208, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

  If it is determined in step S1209 that the pattern can be changed, the symbol to be controlled is changed in step S1210 in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. The specific content of this processing is the same as in step S1204. After executing the processing of step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1209 that the change is not possible, the change standby flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1211, and then the process proceeds to step S1213. . The change standby flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to specify that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting. When the change standby flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1208 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S1212 is executed, and thus the process of step S1209 is executed. To be executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change standby flag are not set, the process directly proceeds to step S1213. Further, the change standby flag is cleared when a positive determination is made in step S1212.

  In step S1213, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in subsequent step S1214, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. It In this case, when it is determined in step S1209 that the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination cannot be changed, the image data of the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching source is directly set in the drawing list. It Then, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display screen G, but since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is the high speed variable display, the player sets the above state. Cannot be recognized or difficult to recognize.

  Further, when the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination cannot be changed, the change standby flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing times. As a result, it is possible to favorably switch the display mode while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 135. In addition, the processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed in the range where the high-speed variable display is performed.

  When the high speed fluctuation display is not being performed (step S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1215. In step S1215, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1216, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends. When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. It

  Next, the background setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background setting process is executed in step S602 in the drawing process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the use designation of separate saved data is set in the drawing list this time. If set, in step S1302, the register 153 stores information for setting the separate storage data corresponding to the designation as the background drawing data.

  If not set (step S1301: NO) or after executing the process of step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, the rearmost image specified in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1304, various parameters specified for the rearmost image are grasped. After that, in step S1305, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the rearmost image. The contents related to this setting are as already described.

  In a succeeding step S1306, the background object designated in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in the step S1307, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S1308, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the background is ended.

  By performing the setting process for the background as described above, it is possible to draw not only in the situation where the use specification of separate save data is not set, but also in the situation where the use specification of separate save data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Along with this, for example, when the drawing list this time relates to the switching of the display mode, it is possible to perform the setting for starting the control of the image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination.

  Next, the background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background drawing data creation process is executed in step S610 in the drawing process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the information on the use setting of the separate storage data is set in the register 153. If not set, in step S1402, hidden surface processing is executed to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface processing is as described above.

  In a succeeding step S1403, it is determined whether or not a separate save execution designation is set in the drawing list this time. If it has not been set, the drawing data creation processing is ended as it is. If set, in step S1404, the target mode area of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145 is set to the background mode created in step S1402. Write the drawing data of. As a result, the drawing data for the background is separately stored. After that, the main drawing data creation process ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1401, if the information on the use setting of the separate storage data is set in the register 153, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, the separate save data is read from the mode area specified this time among the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, and the read separate save data is read as the current save data. It is written in the screen buffer 144 as background drawing data. After that, the main drawing data creation process ends.

  By executing the background drawing data creation process as described above, the background drawing data through the geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to the separately saved data is stored in the screen buffer 144. . In addition, in the frame in which the image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, the drawing data creation process for effect (step S611) and the drawing data creation process for symbol (step S612) are executed to produce the effect. The drawing data and the drawing data for the design are created, and the drawing data composition process (step S613) is executed to create the drawing data for one frame.

  Here, the timing at which the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  26A shows the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 26B shows the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode. 26A shows the ON / OFF state of the power of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 26B shows the presence / absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 26C shows the presence / absence of the second display mode. 26 (d) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 26 (e) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, power supply to the display CPU 131 is started and the display CPU 131 starts processing. Since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display the image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing after the timing of t1. Then, based on the drawing list, the VDP 135 starts to create drawing data corresponding to the first display mode.

  After that, at the timing of t2, the creation of the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode is completed, so that the drawing data is stored as separate storage data for the first display mode in the first mode of the mode buffer 145. It is stored in the usage area 145a. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), a 3D character image shown by “A” to “F” in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and retained while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Further, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing of t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter.

  After that, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the effect operation device 48 being operated at the timing of t3. Then, the drawing data for the second display mode is created, and the display of the image corresponding to the second display mode is started. In addition, since the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is completed at the timing, the drawing data is stored as the separate storage data for the second display mode in the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Memorized in. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 26B, a 3D character image indicated by “G” to “J” in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

  Here, the number of objects to be set in the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode is larger than that of the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode. Then, if the switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that the VDP 135 may drop processing. On the other hand, the processing load is large by creating the separate storage data for the first display mode among the separate storage data for both sides by using the time during which the initial setting is performed at power-on. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode under some circumstances, it is possible to avoid the processing failure by using the separately stored data.

  On the other hand, the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load on the VDP 135 for its creation, and is switched to the second display mode even when the processing load on the VDP 135 is large. It is set so that processing omission does not occur. However, when the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode is also separately stored, and the switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load is relatively large even if the processing omission does not occur. , The separately stored data is used.

  By creating the separate save data as described above, when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time as shown at the timing of t4 to t9, the separate save data is created in each display mode. By displaying the image for the background by utilizing it, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omission.

  In addition, the target of separate storage is the background image, and does not include individual images for which variations such as designs are noticeable. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is fluctuating, even if the image is displayed by using the separately saved data, the movement of the individual image whose fluctuation is noticed is continued. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

  The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, it is possible to favorably switch the display mode by separately storing the drawing data for the background corresponding to each display mode.

  Further, it may be configured such that the switching of the symbol type is performed without waiting, regardless of the display mode switching timing. Further, the symbols may be configured to be the same between the display modes.

  The effect character may also be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may not be a target of separate storage, or may be a target of separate storage.

<Structure for reducing the processing load during special production>
Next, a configuration for reducing the processing load during special effects will be described.

  The special effect is an effect by image display using a large number of image data or three-dimensional image data, and the load of display processing is larger than that of other effects. As a special effect, for example, a player plays a game while expecting a privilege to be given, but there is an effect in which a large number of characters and three-dimensional images are displayed so that the degree of expectation is increased.

  When the display CPU 131 receives a command corresponding to the special effect from the sound emission control device 60, the display CPU 131 executes a process with a reduced processing load. The processing for reducing the processing load in the display CPU 131 during the special effect will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27. The process is executed by the background calculation process (step S503) in the task process (FIG. 12).

  In the background calculation process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether the processing load needs to be reduced. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the pointer of the current processing time in the data table corresponding to the received command includes information indicating that it is necessary to reduce the processing load. . The information indicating that it is necessary to reduce the processing load is included when the processing load increases due to displaying a large number of characters in this processing time (when performing special effects).

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the processing load does not need to be reduced, then in step S1502, if the creation-in-progress flag is stored in the work RAM 132, the flag is deleted. If it is determined that the processing load needs to be reduced (step S1501: YES), the processing load reduction designation information is stored in the work RAM 132 in step S1503. The processing load reduction designation information stored in step S1503 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing and then deleted. The processing load reduction designation information set in the drawing list is referred to when the VDP 135 executes a drawing process described later.

  In a succeeding step S1504, it is determined whether or not the work in progress flag is stored in the work RAM 132. If the in-progress flag is not stored, the in-progress flag is stored in the work RAM 132 in step S1505. The creation in progress flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to recognize whether the drawing data for the background is created halfway.

  After deleting the creation-in-progress flag in step S1502 or storing the creation-in-progress flag in step S1505, in step S1506, the rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. To do. In subsequent step S1507, various parameters of the grasped rearmost image are calculated and updated. In subsequent step S1508, the background update target object is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1509, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and updated. Then, the background calculation process is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1504 that the creation in-progress flag is stored in the work RAM 132, use specification information of the background creation buffer storage data is stored in the work RAM 132 in step S1510. The use specification information of the background creation buffer storage data stored in step S1510 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process and then deleted. The use designation information of the background creation buffer storage data set in the drawing list is referred to when the VDP 135 executes the later-described drawing process. After that, in step S1511, the in-progress flag is erased, and then the background arithmetic processing is ended.

  Through the above processing, when it is not necessary to reduce the processing load (step S1501: NO), the background parameter updating processing in steps S1506 to S1509 is executed each time the background calculation processing is executed (every frame). Is done. When the processing load needs to be reduced (step S1501: YES), the process of steps S1504, S1505, and S1511 is performed every time the background calculation process is executed (for each frame), and the process is being performed. The storage and deletion of the flag in the work RAM 132 is repeated. As a result, every time the background calculation process is executed, the background parameter update process of steps S1506 to S1509 and the background designation buffer storage data use specification information storage process of step S1510 are alternately repeated. Be done. It should be noted that, in the process of erasing the creation in progress flag in step S1502, it is determined that the processing load reduction is unnecessary (step S1501: NO) in the state where the creation in progress flag is stored in the work RAM 132, and thereafter, the creation in progress flag is not deleted, When it is determined that the processing load needs to be reduced (step S1501: YES), this is a process for preventing the use designation information of the background creation buffer storage data from being set in the drawing list.

  Next, description will be made regarding the processing when the VDP 135 receives from the display CPU 131 the drawing list in which the parameters updated in the background calculation processing, the processing load reduction designation information, and the use designation information of the background creation buffer save data are set. To do. In this process, as shown in FIG. 28, the VRAM 301 is set with the buffer 302 for background creation, and the mode buffer 145 is not used. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

  Here, in the VDP 135, the process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, the drawing data is created in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131. At least the processing for outputting the image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b is executed. Of the above, the processing of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 is different from the processing already described in <Basic processing in the VDP 135>.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the content of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. The drawing list when the display CPU 131 determines that the reduction of the processing load is not necessary is the same as that in FIG. 13 except that the item of the separate storage designation is not set, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted and the display CPU 131 will do. The drawing list output when it is determined that the processing load needs to be reduced will be described.

  Note that, in the following description, consecutive frames are expressed as an odd frame and an even frame for convenience of description, but the frame numbers and the like do not have to be odd or even, and odd frames and even frames may be interchanged.

  29A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the drawing list of odd-numbered frames when the display CPU 131 determines that the processing load needs to be reduced, and FIG. 29B is the subsequent processing by the display CPU 131. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the drawing list of even frames when it is determined that the load needs to be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, background image data and objects (hereinafter, also referred to as a background list) are set as drawing targets in the drawing list corresponding to odd-numbered frames. As shown, the background list is not set as the drawing list in the drawing list corresponding to the even frames. Further, the reduction designation information is set in the drawing list corresponding to the odd frame and the even frame, and the use designation information of the background creation buffer storage data is set in the header information of the drawing list corresponding to the even frame. . The background list set in the drawing list corresponding to the odd-numbered frame corresponds to the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 in the even-numbered frame following the frame. It should be noted that no separate save designation is set as the item of each drawing target parameter.

  Others have the same configuration as the drawing list (FIG. 13) already described in <Basic processing in VDP 135>.

  Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received. If a new drawing list has been received, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not the use specification information of the background creation buffer save data is set in the current drawing list. If the use specification information is not set, background geometry calculation processing is executed in step S1603. The geometry calculation processing for the background is the setting processing for the background (step S602) of the drawing processing (FIG. 14) in the <basic processing in the VDP 135> already described, and the conversion processing to the camera coordinate system for the background (step S605). , The same process as the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system regarding the background (step S606) and the clipping process regarding the background (step S607). The processing result of the geometry calculation processing for the background is stored in the background creation buffer 302 and is used in the drawing processing in the next frame. The use of the buffer 302 for background creation will be described later in detail.

  After performing the geometry calculation processing for the background in step S1603, or when it is determined in step S1602 that the use designation information of the buffer creation data for background creation is set, in the following step S1604 Arithmetic processing is executed, and in step S1605, geometry processing for symbols is executed. In these processes, similarly to the background geometry calculation process, the corresponding setting process, the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, and the clipping process are executed.

  In a succeeding step S1606, it is determined whether or not the processing load reduction designation information is set in the drawing list this time. When the processing load reduction designation information is set, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the use designation information of the background creation buffer storage data is set in the current drawing list. If the use specification information is set, in step S1608, the processing result stored in the background geometry calculation processing of the previous drawing processing stored in the background creation buffer 302 (created halfway) Drawing data for the background). Then, in step S1609, the rendering calculation process for the background is executed based on the grasped result of the geometry calculation process.

  The rendering calculation processing for the background includes the lighting processing (step S608) related to the background, the texture mapping processing (step S609) related to the background, and the drawing for the background of the drawing processing (FIG. 14) in the <basic processing in VDP135> described above. The same process as the data creation process (step S610) is executed to create background drawing data in the background buffer 144a of the screen buffer 144.

  After performing the rendering calculation processing for the background in step S1609, or when it is determined in step S1607 that the use designation information of the buffer creation data for background creation is not set, the rendering for rendering is continued in step S1610. The arithmetic processing is executed to create rendering data for rendering in the rendering buffer 144c. Then, in step S1611, the rendering calculation processing for the symbol is executed, and drawing data for the symbol is created in the buffer 144b for the symbol. In the rendering rendering calculation process in step S1610 and the symbol rendering calculation process in step S1611, similarly to the background rendering calculation process, the corresponding setting process, the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, and the view coordinate system are performed. The conversion process and the clipping process are executed. The subsequent drawing data combination process of step S1612 is similar to the drawing data combination process (step S613) of the drawing process (FIG. 14) in <Basic processing of VDP135>. However, when the use specification information of the background storage buffer save data is not set (odd frame), the background drawing data written in the background buffer 144a in the previous processing time (even frame) is the frame. It is written in the buffer 142.

  As described above, when creating the drawing data for the background, the processing load reduction specification information is set in the drawing list and the usage specification information of the background creation buffer save data is not set (odd frame) Executes background geometry calculation processing and stores the processing result in the background creation buffer 302 (step S1603). If the processing load reduction designation information is set in the drawing list and the use designation information of the background creation buffer save data is set (even frame), the previous frame saved in the background creation buffer 302 is set. The result of the geometry calculation processing in (odd frame) is grasped (step S1608), and the rendering calculation processing (step S1609) is performed on the processing result to create background drawing data. That is, the drawing data for the background is created over two frames (consecutive odd frames and even frames).

  Here, with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 31, the drawing data is created in the frame buffer 142 in accordance with the execution of the drawing process (FIG. 30) when the processing load reduction designation is set in the drawing list. While explaining. FIG. 31 (a) is a diagram for explaining creation of drawing data in an odd frame, and FIG. 31 (b) is a diagram for explaining creation of drawing data in an even frame.

  In the odd-numbered frame (FIG. 31A), the background image data is read from the expansion buffer 141 in which various image data are expanded and the background geometry calculation processing is performed based on the drawing list received in the current frame. Is executed, and the processing result is written in the background creation buffer 302 (step S1603). In addition, the rendering image data is read from the development buffer 141, the rendering geometry calculation processing (step S1604) and the rendering calculation processing (step S1609) are executed, and rendering rendering data is stored in the rendering buffer 144b. Created. Further, the image data for the symbol is read from the expansion buffer 141, and the geometry calculation process (step S1605) and the rendering calculation process (step S1610) are executed, and the rendering data for the effect is stored in the symbol buffer 144c. Created.

  Then, the drawing data created in the background buffer 144a, the effect buffer 144b, and the design buffer 144c are written in the frame buffer 142 in an overlapping manner to create drawing data for one frame (step S1611). ). In this case, the background drawing data created in the background buffer 144a is the drawing data created in the previous frame (even frame). Focusing on the drawing data for the background, in the odd-numbered frame, the result of the geometry calculation processing for the background is written in the buffer 302 for creating the background and is already created in the previous frame and written in the buffer 144a for the background. The drawing data for background is written in the frame buffer 142 together with the drawing data for effect and the drawing data for design.

  In the even-numbered frame (FIG. 31 (b)), the drawing data for the effect and the drawing data for the pattern are created based on the drawing list received in the current frame, as in the creation processing for the odd-numbered frame. It is written in the buffer 144b for symbols and the buffer 144c for symbols, respectively.

  As for the drawing data for the background, the result of the geometry calculation process in the previous frame (odd number frame) stored in the buffer 302 for creating the background is grasped (step S1607), and the rendering calculation process is performed on the result (step S1608). ) And written in the background buffer 144a.

  Then, similarly to the odd-numbered frame, the drawing data created in the background buffer 144a, the effect buffer 144b, and the design buffer 144c are written in the frame buffer 142 in an overlapping manner to create one frame of drawing data. Is performed (step S1611). The background drawing data written in the background buffer 144a in the current frame is written in the frame buffer 142 in the current frame (odd frame) and the next frame (even frame).

  Next, the processing time when the drawing process (FIG. 30) is performed will be described. FIG. 32A shows a case where background drawing data is created once every two frames when the processing load is large as in the drawing processing (when the processing load reduction designation information is set in the drawing list). 32B is a time chart showing the drawing processing time, and FIG. 32B is a time chart showing the drawing processing time when the background drawing data is created for each frame regardless of the processing load.

  In FIG. 32, T1 to T3 are intervals of V interrupt signals (1 frame, 20 msec in the present embodiment), and an improper display (so-called process omission) is required until the drawing data combining process is completed during this period. Will be done.

  Further, in the periods of T2 and T3, the long period of the effect geometry calculation process and the effect rendering operation process indicates a state in which the special effect is performed and the processing load is large. On the other hand, during the period T1, the processing load is small.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, during the period of T1 in which the processing load is relatively small, all the processing is performed for each frame even in the drawing processing. Since the processing load is small during the period of T1, even if all the processes (background geometry process to drawing data synthesizing process) are executed, the process is completed within the period of T1 and therefore no process drop occurs.

  In the period of T2 and T3 where the processing load is large, in the drawing process, the geometry calculation process for the background and the rendering calculation process for the background are alternately repeated for each frame as shown in FIG. In the frame, the geometry calculation processing for the background and the rendering calculation processing are completed. As a result, it is possible to complete the process of combining the drawing data within the period of T2 and T3. On the other hand, when both the geometry process and the rendering process of the drawing data for the background are performed for each frame, the drawing data combining process cannot be completed as shown in T2 and T3 periods of FIG. 32B. Processing loss occurs.

  As described above, in the background calculation process of the display CPU 131, when the processing load is large, the use designation information of the background creation buffer saved data is set in the drawing list every other frame, and the process is received in the VDP 135 drawing process. When the use designation information is not in the drawing list, the geometry calculation processing for the background is executed, and when the use designation information is included, the rendering processing for the background is executed. The background rendering process is configured to be executed based on the result of the geometry calculation process written in the background creation buffer in the previous frame. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 135 for creating the drawing data for the background of one frame is reduced, and the processing load of the effect character is increased or the number of effect characters is increased to increase the processing load. Also, it is possible to display an image without causing processing omission.

  When the processing load is relatively small, that is, when the number of characters for rendering is small and the background image is relatively conspicuous, the drawing data for the background is updated every frame, and when the processing load is relatively large, that is, rendering When the background image is relatively unnoticeable by performing a flashy effect by increasing the number of characters for the background, the drawing data for the background is updated every two frames. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load and avoid processing omissions, and to display an image that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Further, when the processing load is large, the background drawing data stored in the background buffer 144a is updated at regular intervals (every other frame). As a result, it is possible to display an image related to a smooth background while reducing the processing load of the VDP 135.

  Further, in an odd frame in which the background drawing data written in the background buffer 144a is not updated, the background drawing data written in the background buffer 144a in the immediately preceding frame is replaced with the frame buffer 142. Since it is written in, it is unlikely that the contents are largely different from the drawing data written in the next frame, and it is possible to perform display with less discomfort for the player.

  Also, when the processing load is large, the drawing data for the background, which often has a small amount of motion (coordinate difference between frames) as a moving image, is updated every other frame, and it is predicted that the motion will be large. The drawing data for effect and the drawing data for design are updated every frame. As a result, it is possible to perform a display with less discomfort for the player as an image in which the drawing data for the background, the drawing data for the effect, and the drawing data for the pattern are combined.

  It should be noted that, when the drawing data for the background is created, the geometry calculation processing is performed in the previous frame and the rendering calculation processing is performed in the subsequent frame of the two consecutive frames, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It suffices if the processing for creating the drawing data is divided into two frames. For example, only the process of writing to the background buffer 144a while performing the hidden surface removal may be performed in the subsequent frame, and the other processes may be performed in the previous frame.

  Further, although the processing of creating the drawing data for the background is performed over two consecutive frames, it may be performed over three or more frames. For example, in the case of creating the drawing data over three frames, a counter whose value is set in the range of 0 to 2 is provided, and the counter is incremented by 1 (or the value of the counter) each time the VDP 135 executes the drawing process. When the maximum value is 2 (or the minimum value is 0), the minimum value is 0 (or the maximum value is 2). Then, in the drawing process, a process corresponding to each value of the counter (a part of the process for creating the drawing data) is executed. In this case, the processing load on the VDP 135 can be further reduced.

  In addition, in odd-numbered frames, 2D image data stored in advance in the memory module may be written in the background buffer 144a or the frame buffer 142. In this case, the 2D image data may be significantly different from the images displayed in the previous and subsequent frames, and thus it is preferable to use the drawing data updated in the previous frame as in the above embodiment. .

  Although the drawing data for the background is created over two frames, the drawing data for effect and the drawing data for patterns may be created over two frames. It is preferable to apply it to drawing data with a small difference (coordinate change, etc.).

  Further, in the display CPU 131, whether or not the processing load needs to be reduced is determined according to whether or not the data table includes information indicating that the processing load needs to be reduced. Alternatively, the configuration may be performed according to the frame order information. For example, it may be determined that the processing load should be reduced in the first frame and that the processing load should not be reduced in the second frame.

  Further, in the present configuration, the drawing data for the background is created by using a plurality of (two) frames, but the drawing data for the background may be created every plural frames. In this case, the processing load may be reduced in the frame in which the drawing data for the background is not created, and the processing for creating the image data used in the subsequent period may be performed using the reduced period. For example, when the image data stored in advance in the memory module is enlarged, reduced, or deformed in the subsequent period, when the image data is enlarged, reduced, or reduced using the reduced period. The image may be displayed in a later period by performing a transformation process and storing the image data and using the stored image data. As a result, it is possible to display an image using image data, which has a heavy load of creation processing. In addition, a part of the drawing data for presentation may be created using the reduced period. In this case, a part of the rendering data for effect is also created every plural frames, so that it is preferable to target the rendering data that is less noticeable to the player.

  Further, in the present configuration, as the drawing data, the drawing data that has been created in the previous frame or the drawing data that has been created halfway in the previous frame and has been created in this frame has been used. In a frame in which the image data of the background object set in the data table changes compared to the immediately preceding frame, the drawing data creation based on the image data is completed in the frame, and the drawing data is saved. It may be configured to be used. As a result, it is possible to display an image based on the changed image data at a timing when the image data changes at a good timing.

  Although the drawing process is performed based on the three-dimensional image data, the drawing process may be performed based on the two-dimensional image data.

  When the processing load is large in the drawing processing, the geometry calculation result in the odd frame is stored in the background creation buffer 302, and the rendering calculation is performed on the geometry calculation result in the even frame to obtain the drawing data for the background. Although it is created and written to the background buffer 144a, a plurality of background buffers 144a may be provided to alternately write the geometry calculation result and read the drawing data. The configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram for explaining how the drawing data is created in the first frame, FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram for explaining that in the second frame, and FIG. 34 (a) is that for the third frame. FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram for explaining it in the fourth frame. With this configuration, drawing data is created while reducing the processing load by repeating the first to fourth frames.

  Unlike the drawing process (FIG. 31) described above, this configuration does not have the background creation buffer 302, but has two background buffers 144a and 144a '.

  In the first frame (FIG. 33 (a)) to the fourth frame (FIG. 34 (b)), with respect to the drawing data for effect and the drawing data for design, drawing data is created for each frame and written in the frame buffer 142. Be done. The following mainly describes the process of creating drawing data for the background.

  In the first frame (FIG. 33A), since the background drawing data created in the previous fourth frame has been written in the background buffer 144a, it is written in the frame buffer 142. Further, based on the drawing list received in the current frame, the background image data is read from the expansion buffer 141 in which various image data are expanded, the background geometry calculation processing is executed, and the processing result is the background. Buffer 144a 'for writing.

  In the second frame (FIG. 33B), the result of the geometry calculation processing in the previous frame (first frame) stored in the background buffer 144a 'is grasped. Then, rendering calculation processing is performed on the result to create drawing data, which is written in the background buffer 144 a ′ and is written in the frame buffer 142.

  In the third frame (FIG. 34 (a)), since the background drawing data created in the previous second frame is written in the background buffer 144a ′, the background buffer 144a ′ is also used in the frame buffer 142 in this frame. Write in. Further, based on the drawing list received in the current frame, the background image data is read from the expansion buffer 141 in which various image data are expanded, the background geometry calculation processing is executed, and the processing result is the background. Buffer 144a for writing.

  In the fourth frame (FIG. 34B), the result of the geometry calculation processing in the previous frame (third frame) stored in the background buffer 144a is grasped. Rendering calculation processing is performed on the result to create drawing data, which is written in the background buffer 144a and is written in the frame buffer 142. After the processing of the fourth frame is completed, the processing of the first frame is executed.

  By repeating the processing of the first frame to the fourth frame as described above, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the drawing processing.

  Alternatively, a hemispherical object may be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture based on moving image data may be attached to the inner surface of the object. By arranging the viewpoint inside the hemisphere and changing the direction, it becomes possible to display the moving image while changing the display area.

<Structure for displaying 3D image using connected object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a 3D image using a connected object will be described.

  The connected object is a unit of objects in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected with the connecting part as a joint, and is set to give a motion to the character of the 3D image by relatively displacing each part object. Has been done. By using the connected object, the character of the 3D image can be smoothly moved. In addition, considering that the connected object has a skeleton portion and a joint portion, it can be referred to as a bone model.

  The connected object is set to display a character performing a predetermined action. Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), a first connected object PC35 and a second connected object PC36 are set in order to display a common character. Each of the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 has a plurality of connected portions CT1 and CT2, but the connected portions CT1 and CT2 are set at mutually different positions.

  Specifically, the first connected object PC35 is not provided with a connecting portion at the knee portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a-1) and (a-2). It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connected object PC36 does not have the connecting portion at the elbow portion, but has the connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. 35 (b-1) and (b-2). The operation can be displayed. By setting the connecting portions at different positions as described above, it is possible to make the character perform different actions depending on whether the first connected object PC35 is used or the second connected object PC36 is used. Becomes

  Although the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at the common location, they may not have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at the common location. Further, a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, but the texture may be set individually for each. The positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the types of the characters are arbitrary as long as it is possible to cause the character to perform different actions by preparing a plurality of connecting objects PC35 and PC36.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the state in which the character is moving using the above-described connected objects PC35 and PC36 will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the connected object executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the connected object is executed by the calculation process for effect in step S504 of the task process (FIG. 12). Further, the arithmetic processing for the connected object is started when the data table corresponding to the game time in which the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is executed is set.

  First, in step S1701, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the effect using the linked objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (the character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1702 whether it is the start timing of the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, the start designation information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the following step S1704, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table. To do. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S1704, the control start process is completed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S501). Further, the control information of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the series of effects of this time using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is completed.

  In a succeeding step S1705, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC35. In step S1706, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36.

  In the following step S1707, the designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, in the effect using the linked objects PC35 and PC36, the entire effect period is divided into a plurality of types of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC35 during the first effect period and the third effect period, and the character is displayed using the second connected object PC36 during the second effect period. After that, in step S1708, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35, PC36 is set so as to be specified in the current drawing list.

  In a succeeding step S1709, another object for the first effect period and an object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S1709, the control start process has been completed for the object to be updated this time in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S501). After that, in step S1710, various parameters of the above-mentioned grasped other object are calculated to update the control information related to these other objects, and then the present calculation processing is ended.

  When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in these drawing objects. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Further, the start designation information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 should be started and the specification information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period are set in the drawing list. To be done.

  On the other hand, when the effect using the linked objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (step S1701: YES), in step S1711, is the first effect period based on the currently set data table? Determine whether or not. In the case of the first effect period, after executing the processing of steps S1704 to S1710, the present calculation processing is ended. By the way, since this time is in the first effect period, the first connected object PC35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 35 (a)) along with the progress of the first effect period. First, the parameters are calculated in step S1705.

  When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in these drawing objects. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Further, the designation information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

  When it is determined in step S1711 that it is not in the first effect period, it is determined in step S1712 whether or not it is in the second effect period based on the currently set data table. In the case of the second effect period, in step S1713, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In a succeeding step S1714, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC35. In step S1715, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36. By the way, since this time is in the second effect period, the second connected object PC36 performs a predetermined second operation (see FIG. 35 (b)) along with the progress of the second effect period. In addition, parameter calculation is performed in step S1715.

  In the following step S1716, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S1717, the parameter of the second linked object PC36 of both linked objects PC35 and PC36 is designated in the current drawing list. Set.

  In a succeeding step S1718, another object for the second effect period, which is an object to be updated this time, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, in the second effect period, the effect is more developed than in the first effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S501) for the object increased by the switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1718. After that, in step S1719, the various parameters of the other objects that have been grasped are calculated, the control information relating to these other objects is updated, and then the present calculation processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in these drawing objects. On the other hand, the parameters of the second connected object PC 36 are set. Further, the designation information of the second effect period indicating that it is the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S1712 that it is not in the second effect period, it means that it is the third effect period, and therefore the process proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In the following step S1721, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC35. By the way, since this time is in the third effect period, the first connected object PC35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 35 (a)) along with the progress of the third effect period. First, the parameter calculation is performed in step S1721. In step S1722, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36.

  In the following step S1723, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and further, in step S1724, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 is specified in the current drawing list. Set.

  In subsequent step S1725, another object for the third effect period, which is the object to be updated this time, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, in the third effect period, the effect is more developed than in the second effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S501) for the object increased by the change from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1725. After that, in step S1726, various parameters of the other objects that have been grasped are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated, and then the present calculation processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in these drawing objects. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Further, the designation information of the third effect period indicating that it is the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the setting process for the connected object effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the connected object effect is executed in the effect setting process of step S603 in the drawing process (FIG. 14). Further, the setting process for the connected object effect is activated when the start designation of the connected object effect or the designation of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the start designation of the linked object effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S1802, the address to which the first linked object PC35 is pre-transferred in the VRAM134 is grasped based on the current drawing list, and the first linked object PC35 is read. . In step S1803, the address to which the second connected object PC 36 has been transferred in advance in the VRAM 134 is grasped based on the current drawing list, and the second connected object PC 36 is read.

  In a succeeding step S1804, uniform α value setting processing for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied to all the pixels of the first connected object PC35 as it is, while The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC36.

  In the following step S1805, the parameter designated for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameter of both connected objects PC35, PC36. After that, in step S1806, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is the processing time related to the start designation of the connected object effect, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged in the world coordinate system. The shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, but the connecting portions of the respective component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are applied to the second connected object PC36 as they are, there are pixels whose coordinate designations do not match, but such pixels are subjected to a predetermined adjustment on the VDP135 side. .

  In the following step S1807, other objects for the first effect period designated in the drawing list this time are grasped, and in step S1808, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S1809, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the main connected object effect is ended.

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the placement of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 in the world coordinate system is started at the same time. Further, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged at the same position in the world coordinate system in an overlapping manner. However, since the processing of step S1804 is executed, the second connected object PC36 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering. Therefore, the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed on the display screen G. Only PC35 is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that the start designation of the linked object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the designation of the first effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

  If set, the process of steps S1804 to S1809 is executed, and then this setting process ends. In this case, in step S1806, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from the information of the parameters set corresponding to the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. Update.

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, various parameters of the both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S1804 is executed, the both connected objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first connected object PC35 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S1805 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connected operation is performed on the display screen G along with the progress of the first effect period. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S1810 that the designation of the first effect period is not set in the drawing list this time, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the designation of the second effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

  If it has been set, in step S1812, a process for setting a uniform α value for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to "0" which is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to "1" which is opaque information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is to all the pixels of the second connected object PC36, whereas The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the connected object PC35 of 1.

  In the following step S1813, the parameter designated for the second connected object PC36 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameter of both connected objects PC35, PC36. After that, in step S1814, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the second effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list in association with the second connected object PC36. Check the parameter information and update it. In this case, the shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, but the connecting portions of the respective component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the second connected object PC36 are applied to the first connected object PC35 as they are, there are pixels whose coordinate designations do not match, but such pixels are subjected to a predetermined adjustment on the VDP135 side. .

  In the following step S1815, other objects for the second effect period designated in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S1816, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S1817, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the effect of the connected object is ended. Here, if the current processing time is the timing related to switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, so in step S1817, processing corresponding to that is executed. .

  By executing the setting process for the connection object effect as described above, various parameters of both connection objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S1812 is executed, both connection objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the second connected object PC36 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S1813 corresponds to the second linked object PC36, the second linked object PC36 is used so that the second motion is performed on the display screen G as the second effect period progresses. The object PC 36 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S1811, that the designation of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list. The process proceeds to step S1818.

  In step S1818, uniform α value setting processing for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied to all the pixels of the first connected object PC35 as it is, while The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC36.

  In the following step S1819, the parameter designated for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameter of both connected objects PC35, PC36. After that, in step S1820, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is the processing time relating to the update of the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35, PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list in association with the first connected object PC35. Check the parameter information and update it.

  In the following step S1821, other objects for the third effect period designated in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S1822, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S1823, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the main connected object effect is ended. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, so in step S1823, the corresponding process is executed. .

  By executing the setting process for the connection object effect as described above, various parameters of both connection objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S1818 is executed, both connection objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first connected object PC35 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S1819 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connection is performed on the display screen G so that the first operation is performed as the third effect period progresses. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the connected object effect. In addition, FIG. 38 (a) shows the first effect period, FIG. 38 (b) shows the second effect period, and FIG. 38 (c) shows the third effect period. 38 (a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 38 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) are The display screen G is shown. 38 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image and the design are omitted, but the background image is actually displayed on the back side of the image for each effect. At the same time, the design is displayed on the front side.

  In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 38 (a-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC36 is transparentized. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (a-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first motion is performed along with the progress of the first effect period. . Further, the characters CH13 to CH15 shown in "A" to "C" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

  In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 38 (b-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the first connected object PC35 is subjected to the transparency processing. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (b-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the second connected object PC36 is displayed on the display screen G, and the second motion is performed as the second effect period progresses. .

  Here, when comparing FIGS. 38 (a-2) and 38 (b-2), it is shown that both characters CH12 have different shapes, but in reality, both connected objects PC35, The same texture is mapped to the PC 36, and the connecting portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same, or similar image is displayed on the display screen G for the character CH12, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the change. . However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC35, PC36.

  Further, in the second effect period, the characters CH13 to CH17 indicated by "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH17 is greater than that in the first effect period.

  In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 38 (c-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC36 is subjected to the transparency processing. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (c-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first motion is performed along with the progress of the third effect period. . Further, in the third effect period, the characters CH13 to CH19 shown in "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH19 is greater than that in the second effect period.

  As described above, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for the common character, the connected objects PC35 and PC36 to be displayed can be switched according to the type of motion using the joint portion. . For example, when trying to perform a plurality of types of operations with a single connected object, it becomes necessary to set the corresponding number of connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the NAND flash memory 162 may exceed the capacity that can be stored as a single image data. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time for handling will be extended. On the other hand, since it is set as a plurality of connected objects PC35, PC36, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions without causing the inconveniences described above.

  In addition, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many occasions where the effects are modified, and if the entire movement of the linked object is reviewed every time the motion of the character is modified, it takes a lot of time for the design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35, PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the already created connected object PC35 , It becomes unnecessary to modify all of the PC 36. Therefore, it is possible to allow the character to perform a plurality of types of motions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be designed well.

  Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object before the timing of switching the connected object to display the character is set as the control target in the display CPU 131 and arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. Be targeted. As a result, when the switching timing comes, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control starting process for the switching destination object, but execute the control updating process having a smaller processing load than the control starting process. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

  In particular, at the switching timing, the effect develops and the number of displayed objects increases, so that the processing load on the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 becomes relatively large. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the control start processing is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135. However, as described above, the control updating processing is performed on the switching destination object. Since it suffices to execute the processing, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the processing omission.

  Further, since both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged at the same time in the world coordinate system and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between the completely transparent information and the non-transparent information, the display CPU 131 has a uniform α value for both switching. Switching may be designated, and in the VDP 135, the uniform α value to be applied may be switched according to the designation. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

  Further, the display CPU 131 provides the VDP 135 with only the parameter information for the connected object to be displayed of the connected objects PC35 and PC36 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. As a result, the amount of data set in the drawing list can be reduced. Further, in the VDP 135, since the parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 may be updated in the same manner, the processing load of the VDP 135 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the switching from the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the action of the effect character different from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared is performed. The configuration may be newly added, or the configuration may be such that, in addition to the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared, the display of the effect character having a large processing load is started.

  The control start timing of the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 36 and the control start timing of the VDP 135 may not be the same as those of the first connected object PC 35. For example, the timing may be before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period but after the control start timing of the first connected object PC35.

  Further, although the processing load at the switching timing of the effect period is larger than that of the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 36 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are not arranged in the world coordinate system at the same time, it is not necessary to uniformly control the α value and switch the display target.

  In addition, for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display object may be switched not by uniformly adjusting the α value, but by switching the rendering object. In this case, since the connected object on the side that is not the display target is not rendered, the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the third effect period is not provided, or the effect period longer than the fourth effect period may be set. Alternatively, three or more connected objects may be prepared for one character.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 20, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask an object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required to store the image data.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the drawing data for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is separately stored, and is stored in the player's staging operation device 48 in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large. When the display mode is switched based on the operation of, the separately stored data is used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions even when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 34, the drawing data for the background is created using a plurality of update periods. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 135, avoid a processing drop, and perform display with less discomfort to the player.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, connected objects to be displayed according to the type of motion using the joint portion. The objects PC35 and PC36 can be switched. For example, when trying to perform a plurality of types of operations with a single connected object, it becomes necessary to set the corresponding number of connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the NAND flash memory 162 may exceed the capacity that can be stored as a single image data. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time for handling will be extended. On the other hand, since it is set as a plurality of connected objects PC35, PC36, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions without causing the inconveniences described above.

  In addition, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many occasions where the effects are modified, and if the entire movement of the linked object is reviewed every time the motion of the character is modified, it takes a lot of time for the design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35, PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the already created connected object PC35 , It becomes unnecessary to modify all of the PC 36. Therefore, it is possible to allow the character to perform a plurality of types of motions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be designed well.

<Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of this embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this embodiment.

  The configuration shown in FIG. 39 includes a main controller 50, as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50, a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, a power supply function of supplying power to each device including the main control device 50, and a drive control of the game ball launching mechanism 58, and The firing control device 57, the main display unit 33 that displays the result of the game, and the accessory display unit 34 that displays the result of the electric-role opening lottery are electrically connected. In addition, a voice light emission control device 60 is provided which drives and controls the various light emitting parts 35, 36, 44 and the speaker part 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 and receives an operation signal from the operation device 48 for performance. In addition, a display control device 70 for controlling the symbol display device 31 based on a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 is provided.

  The hardware configuration of the display control device 70 is different from that of the display control device 130 in the first embodiment. The hardware configuration of the display control device 70 will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. To be done. Note that the reception of a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the voice emission control device 60, and includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board. Be done.

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and based on the command received from the voice light emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 74 is stored in the work RAM 73 or the VRAM 75. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 31 to output an image signal. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

  The memory module 74 stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, background data, and moving images. It is a storage unit that stores in advance various image data (image information) including image data and the like. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, and in particular, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape or pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described later in detail.

  The work RAM 73 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 74 and transferred, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to the DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 72 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to the SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the timing of executing the process in the VDP 76 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. It is a kind of drawing circuit for operating the image processing device 31b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 76 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 76 should be called a microcomputer chip containing a drawing-specific firmware.

  In detail, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving picture decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these respective circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and the I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  In the VDP 76, the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 is stored in the register 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. It should be noted that all of the control programs for the control unit 91 to operate may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91 and the contents of the control program and the drawing list are Alternatively, the control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 74.

  As the above processing, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The drawing data for one frame is the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say that.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas (unit setting areas) corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. ing. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, in the situation where drawing is executed on the symbol display device 31 using drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

  The display circuit 94 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 31a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 31 through the connected output port 78. Further, the display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. The display circuit 94 is provided with a scaler 97 and an image signal output unit 98 in order to generate and output the image signal. The scaler 97 and the image signal output unit 98 will be described in detail later.

  The moving image decoder 93 also decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The details of the process will be described later.

<Specific configuration of memory module 74>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 74 will be described.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module 74. As shown in FIG. 40, the memory module 74 is configured by packaging the controller 101 and the NAND flash memory 102 into one package. A memory cell array is provided in the NAND flash memory 102. In order to display an image on the area 103 for the control program in which the control program data of the display CPU 72 is stored in the memory cell array and the pattern display device 31. An image data area 104 storing image data to be used is provided.

  The controller 101 has a main body side I / F 111 that transmits and receives data to and from the display CPU 72 that is a transfer instruction source and the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 that is a data transfer destination, and a storage side I / F that transmits and receives data to and from the NAND flash memory 102. / F112, a controller CPU113, a control ROM114 and a control RAM115, which are control units that perform data control processing in the controller 101 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 102, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU113. A transfer execution circuit 116 that executes reading of data from the memory 102, a cache memory 117 that temporarily stores the data read by the transfer execution circuit 116, and the NAND flash memory 10 An error correction circuit 118 for performing error detection and correction of errors detected in data read from, and a.

  Generally, the NAND flash memory 102 is used while avoiding a block including a defect in the memory cell array. The presence / absence and location of this defective block differ depending on the individual. Therefore, the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 needs to be associated with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 102, and the association is performed by the controller CPU 113.

  Specifically, the control ROM 114 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates a logical address with an address of each page of the physical block. The addressing command received from the display CPU 72 is temporarily stored in the addressing buffer of the control RAM 115. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115, the controller CPU 113 reads the address management table from the control ROM 114 and grasps the address of the page of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, a transfer instruction is issued from the controller CPU 113 to the transfer execution circuit 116, and data is transferred in the transfer execution circuit 116 so that the data of the physical address related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. The process is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred to the work RAM 73 or the VRAM 75.

  By the way, as the control ROM 114, a randomly accessible memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory is used. Further, as the cache memory 117, one having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of the NAND flash memory 102 is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and, more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to the DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

  The memory module 74 is provided with a boot memory 119 in which boot data for initial startup in the display CPU 72 is stored in advance. A mask ROM is used as the boot memory 119 so that random access is possible, and when the data read of the same capacity is compared, the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102. It is used. The boot memory 119 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is higher than that of the NAND flash memory 102, and an internal power supply such as a battery. It may be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit equipped with.

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 119 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 102. Specifically, it has the same, substantially the same, or similar storage capacity as that of one page in the NAND flash memory 102. Boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, and when the processing at the time of initial startup is executed in the display CPU 72, the data is read from the boot memory 119, not from the NAND flash memory 102. Is read. As the boot data for the initial activation, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76, and an instruction code for transferring the data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 to the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 are set.

  The controller 101 executes a data transfer process. The content of the data transfer process is the same as the data transfer process (FIG. 7) of the controller 161 in the first embodiment. Further, the operational effect obtained by executing the data transfer process is also the same as that of the first embodiment.

<Development Buffer 81 of Work RAM 73 and VRAM 75>
Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 to which data is transferred from the memory module 74 in advance will be described.

  First, the work RAM 73 will be described.

  In the work RAM 73, as shown in FIG. 39, specifically, while the situation in which the transferred data may be used after being used once is continued, power to the work RAM 73 is specifically increased. A regular area 73a for storing and holding while the supply is continued, and a changing area 73b to be overwritten when transferring other data after use are provided.

  Program data necessary for advancing main processing (FIG. 9), V interrupt processing (FIG. 11), command interrupt processing, and the like in the display CPU 72 is written in the regular area 73a. By providing the common area 73a, it is possible to smoothly start the main process, the V interrupt process, the command interrupt process, and the like that are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

  If it becomes necessary to temporarily store data that exceeds the storage capacity of the changing area 73b, all or part of the data in the regular area 73a may be stored within a range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing in the display CPU 72. It may be configured to be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary for the data to be returned to the common area 73a by the start of the corresponding process.

  Program data necessary for executing a subroutine activated as necessary in each of these processes is written in the change area 73b. In addition, program data necessary for a subroutine to be executed next may be transferred to the change area 73b during execution of a predetermined subroutine. It is done so as not to erase. By providing the changing area 73b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 73 is suppressed smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, the work RAM 73 is not supplied with backup power. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 73 is erased or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 will be described.

  To the expansion buffer 81, specifically, the power supply to itself is continued while the situation in which the transferred image data may be used even after being used once is continued. During use, a regular area 81a for storing and holding and a changing area 81b that is overwritten when other image data is transferred after use are provided.

  In the regular area 81a, background data and pattern sprite data used when starting variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 31 are written, and an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected. Abnormality notification data used when displaying is written. By providing the common area 81a, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly issued from the display CPU 72, the VDP 76 can perform good drawing of an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 81a. it can.

  When it becomes necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the changing area 81b, the entire or one area of the regular area 81a may be included within a range that does not hinder the smooth image display on the symbol display device 31. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the data of the copy is temporarily erased. In this case, the restoration of the image data to the common area 81a needs to be performed by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

  In the change area 81b, effect sprite data and moving image data such as effect characters are written. Further, the image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 81b while the predetermined effect is being executed, but the transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect being executed. Not done. Since the change area 81b is provided as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in the configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 81 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, the VRAM 75 is not supplied with backup power. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the VRAM 75 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 72>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 72 will be described.

  In the display CPU 72, main processing is started when supply of operating power is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. The content of the main processing is the same as the main processing (FIG. 9) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the following points.

  The initial image data requested to be transferred in step S307 and the regular image data requested to be transferred in step S314 are 2D image data. Further, various parameters grasped in step S311 are address information of an area to which the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 75, information of the target frame areas 82a and 82b for which drawing data should be created using the initial image data, Information of coordinates when writing the initial image data in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, information of scale when writing the initial image data, and a uniform α value (translucent value) when writing the initial image data. Contains information.

  By executing the main process in the display CPU 72, it is possible to execute the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. The contents of the command interruption process are the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, the content of the V interrupt processing is the same as the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11) executed by the display CPU 131 of the first embodiment except for the task processing of step S407.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  In the VDP 76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, And the process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. The process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the content of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 41A to 41C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b is to be created, is set for the image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, in the header information, the presence / absence of decoding designation and the information of the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of various designation information will be described later.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information described above, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set. Furthermore, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information and are set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serially-numbered numerical information, and the information of the image data to be used in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information is set. Further, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set such that the individual image to be displayed is positioned so as to be positioned on the back side of the display screen G in the image for one frame, and the individual image is to be drawn first. The individual image is a still image defined by still image data such as background data, or a sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 41A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b, and then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written. In addition, in the image for one frame, the individual images are displayed in the order of the background image, the effect image, and the design so as to be on the front side.

  Plural kinds of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), .... Regarding the parameter P (1) of the background data, specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), information on the address of the area in the VRAM 75 to which the background data is transferred and on the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written Of the frame area 82a, 82b with respect to the coordinate information indicating the position, the rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written, and the size set as the initial state of the background data. Information of the scale that indicates the magnification when writing to, the information of the uniform α value that indicates the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing the background data, and whether the α data is applied or not Information and are set. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG. 41 (c).

  Here, the coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels that make up the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is designated. The VDP 76 can recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinate. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the information capacity of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central one pixel, and may be a pixel having a corner angle such as an upper left corner or an upper right corner. Since sprite data and still image data are basically defined as rectangular shapes, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixel by using the corner pixel as the reference pixel.

  Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all dots of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

  In the situation where the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of the background data and the sprite data may be uniformly controlled for all pixels instead of being finely controlled in pixel units. It is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with uniform α values, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

  Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is completed. If the drawing data has been created, it is determined in step S1902 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S1903 a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed.

  In the response processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from which information of the target buffer included in the drawing list, which frame area 82a, 82b is to be created for one frame of the image corresponding to the drawing list received this time. The specified frame area is set as the drawing data creation target. Further, the presence / absence of the decode designation is grasped, and when the decode designation is present, the address to which the moving picture data to be decoded is transferred is grasped, and the moving picture decoder is operated so as to decode the moving picture data. . Details of this decoding will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S1904, a content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, color palette data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. In a succeeding step S1905, a writing process is executed. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the contents grasping process in step S1904, the image data of the drawing target of this time is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b set as the generation targets.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1901 that the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S1906. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 is executed for the switched image data. That is, the drawing data of one frame image specified by one drawing list is created by executing the drawing process a plurality of times.

  Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process is also possible. It is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be adopted.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1902 or after the processing of step S1905 is executed, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the image signal output for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it is not completed, the main drawing process is ended as it is, and if it is completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72, and then the main drawing process is ended.

  The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the generation of drawing data for one frame after the frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. In the above, the frame areas 82a and 82b which are the drawing targets of the drawing data are regulated so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signals.

<Task processing in display CPU 72>
Next, the task processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described.

  As described above, the task processing is executed to grasp the information necessary for creating the drawing list in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72. In this case, in the task processing, not only the individual image included in the range of the image for one frame, but also the individual image not included in the range of the image for one frame are controlled.

  With reference to FIG. 43, the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 that is the calculation target in the display CPU 72 will be described. Note that, in FIG. 43, the range partitioned by the one-dot chain line is the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, and the range partitioned by the two-dot chain line is the drawing range PL2 for one frame defined in each of the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 for one frame are both defined as a rectangular shape, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular shape. In addition, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is defined such that the virtual area defined is larger than the drawing range PL2 for one frame, and the range is defined as a width including the entire drawing range PL2 for one frame. Has been done. This size is set to a size that allows a plurality of drawing ranges PL2 for one frame to be arranged in both the vertical and horizontal directions.

  The display CPU 72 calculates an individual image by using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 as a calculation target range, and the reference coordinates are set as a position reference for the calculation. The reference coordinates are arbitrary as long as they are defined as one dot among the dots included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but in the pachinko machine 10, the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the initial setting position. The dot in the upper left corner of the drawing range PL2 in this state is defined. The initial setting position is a position where the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the center of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1.

  Since the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as described above, the display CPU 72 does not include the image for one frame, but the individual image is included in the image for one frame at the subsequent update timing. It is possible to start the calculation in advance for. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, by using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, it is possible to execute an effect in which the viewpoint is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. That is, the position of the drawing range PL2 for one frame can be displaced from the initial setting position in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. The calculation for performing this effect is executed by the task processing of the display CPU 72.

  The task processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not it is a viewpoint switchable period. The viewpoint switchable period is set, for example, as a period from the start of variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 31 to the stop of variable display of symbols in the first symbol row Z1 or the next symbol row Z2. May be set as the period during which the notice display is being displayed on the symbol display device 31 or may be set as the period during which the reach display is being performed on the symbol display device 31. It may be set as a period in which a specific reach effect is performed in 31, or may be set as a period in which the jackpot effect is performed in the symbol display device 31. Further, information on whether or not the viewpoint can be switched is set in the data table.

  If it is in the viewpoint switchable period, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not the viewpoint is switched. The viewpoint switching state refers to a state in which the drawing range PL2 for one frame is set to a position different from the initial setting position, and the viewpoint switching flag is set in the work RAM 73 when the viewpoint is switched. As a result, the viewpoint switching state is set, and when the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position, the flag is erased, and the viewpoint switching state is released.

  If the viewpoint switching state is not set, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not there is a viewpoint switching instruction. Presence / absence of the viewpoint switching instruction is determined by determining whether or not an operation generation command has been received from the voice emission control device 60.

  Here, the operation generation command is transmitted based on the effect operation device 48 being operated as already described, and further, in correspondence with the fact that a plurality of viewpoint switchable positions are set, The operation generation command includes information on the position of the switching target. Whether or not the operation generation command is received is determined in step S402 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 11). If the operation generation command is received, it is determined in step S403 that the operation generation command is received. The flag shown is set in the work RAM 73, and information corresponding to the type of operation generation command is set in the work RAM 73.

  If there is a viewpoint switching instruction, in step S2004, a coordinate changing process of the drawing range PL2 is executed. In the coordinate changing process, it is determined which coordinate is included in the operation generation command corresponding to the current switching instruction, and the drawing range PL2 is moved to the coordinate corresponding to the instruction. The information of the coordinates of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that Further, in the coordinate changing process, the viewpoint switching state is set.

  On the other hand, when the viewpoint is already switched (step S2002: NO), it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied. Whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied is determined by determining whether or not the operation cancellation command is received from the voice emission control device 60. The specific processing configuration for determining whether or not the operation release command has been received is the same as that for the operation generation command.

  If the cancellation condition is satisfied, then in step S2006, a drawing range restoration process is executed. In the restoration process, the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position. Further, the viewpoint switching state is canceled in the return processing. If it is determined that it is not the viewpoint switchable period (step S2001: NO), the process of step S2006 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the process of step S2004 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the process of step S2006 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, it is determined whether or not an individual image to be controlled is present. The individual image to be controlled is shown in the currently set data table, and is set in association with the positions of the plural types of drawing ranges PL2 during the viewpoint switching period. Further, the individual image to be controlled is not all the individual images that can be arranged on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but the currently set drawing range PL2 and the specified number of dots vertically and horizontally from the drawing range PL2. Individual images included in the outer range and not yet set as control targets are extracted.

  If the individual image to be controlled is present, it is determined in step S2008 whether there are a plurality of individual images to be controlled. If a plurality of individual images do not exist, the single individual image is recognized as the control start target, and the process proceeds to step S2012 without executing the processes of steps S2009 to S2011.

  If there are a plurality of images (step S2008: YES), it is determined in step S2009 whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target that is included in the currently set drawing range PL2. To determine. That is, in the configuration in which the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set in the display CPU 72 as described above, and individual images outside the currently set drawing range PL2 can also be set as control targets, individual control start targets can be set. Since the image includes not only the image within the drawing range PL2 but also the image outside the drawing range PL2, it is determined in step S2009 which one the image corresponds to. By the way, the coordinates of the control start position of the individual image included in the control start target are set in the currently set data table, and the coordinates of the control start position and the currently set coordinates of the drawing range PL2 are set. By referring to, the relative position of the individual image included in the control start target with respect to the drawing range PL2 is grasped.

  When there is a control start target individual image at least a part of which is included in the drawing range PL2, the individual image is grasped as the current control start target in step S2010. In this case, when a plurality of individual images to be controlled start are included in the drawing range PL2, all of them are grasped as the controlled start targets. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the individual image is outside the drawing range PL2 so that a situation in which there are a plurality of individual images that are control start targets within the drawing range PL2 in one processing of the task processing does not occur. It may be configured to be set as the control start target in the processing times where the processing load is low and the processing load is low.

  On the other hand, when the individual image of the control start target is not included in the drawing range PL2, it means that a plurality of control start targets exist outside the drawing range PL2. In this case, in step S2011, of the individual images outside the drawing range PL2, the individual image closer to the currently set drawing range PL2 is grasped as the control start target.

  Incidentally, as a result of the processing of step S2010 or step S2011, the individual image whose control start timing has been postponed is grasped as the control start target in the subsequent processing times. In this case, when the individual image displayed as if moving in the predetermined direction at each image update timing is postponed, the control start time parameter of the individual image including the control start position corresponds to one update timing. It is updated on the data table so that it is in the advanced state. Thereby, even if the control start timing is postponed, the individual image is displayed at a predetermined position and state at a predetermined timing.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2008, or after the processing of either step S2010 or step S2011 is executed, the control start processing of steps S2012 to S2014 is executed. In the control start processing, first, in step S2012, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual images, and the pair of individual images grasped as the control start target is searched. A free buffer area is secured so that 1 corresponds.

  In the following step S2013, the initialization process is executed for all the empty buffer areas secured in step S2012. In a succeeding step S2014, a control start parameter corresponding to the individual image is set in the empty buffer area initialized in the step S2013. The parameters for starting the control include the position, rotation angle, and size of the target individual image on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When there are a plurality of individual images that are grasped as the control start target, the control start parameter is set individually for each free buffer area corresponding to each individual image.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2007 or after the process of step S2014 is executed, the control update process of steps S2015 to S2018 is executed. In the control update process, first, in step S2015, the background calculation process is executed. In the background calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped from the background still image that constitutes the background image and the background sprite. Further, with respect to the grasped control update target, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the various parameters thus derived are written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

  In a succeeding step S2016, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation processing, the control update target of this time is grasped from the effect sprites that form the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect. Further, the various parameters described above are derived with respect to the grasped control update target. Then, the various parameters thus derived are written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

  In a succeeding step S2017, symbol calculation processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner in each game. Further, the various parameters described above are derived with respect to the grasped control update target. Then, the various parameters thus derived are written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

  By the way, in each processing of steps S2015 to S2017, animation data set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance, and is transferred to the work RAM 73 in advance by the time when it needs to be read by the display CPU 72.

  After that, in step S2018, the process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed, and then this task process is ended. In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, among the individual images that have been subjected to the control update by the processes of steps S2015 to S2017, the individual images included in the image for one frame related to the drawing data creation instruction this time are displayed. Perform the process of grasping.

  The grasping is performed by referring to the currently set information of the drawing range PL2 and the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale of various individual images, and executing a predetermined calculation. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. As described above, it is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by setting only the individual images to be displayed as the individual images specified in the drawing list, not all the individual images for which control has been started. There is no need to uselessly perform drawing processing for individual images that are not display targets even if they are not sorted. As a result, the processing load on the VDP 76 can be reduced.

  As described above, for the individual image that is the control start target, “search for empty buffer area” in step S2012, “initialize reserved buffer area” in step S2013, and “set parameter for starting control” in step S2014. And any of the "variable parameter update procedure" of steps S2015 to S2017 is executed, while for the individual image only for control update, one of the "various parameter updates" of steps S2015 to S2017. Only the renewal procedure is executed. Therefore, the processing load of the individual image that is the control start target is larger than that of the individual image that is the control update target only. Note that the processing of step S2014 may not be executed, and the processing for replacing the individual image for which control is started may be executed in any of steps S2015 to S2017.

  Here, as already described, it is necessary to update the image at a cycle of 20 msec, and this image update is performed by transmitting the drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing to the VDP 76. Then, the task process takes 20 msec to create the drawing list and receive it by the VDP 76, and to create the drawing data corresponding to one frame of the image based on the drawing list. Must be completed in a shorter period than the period minus. Under such circumstances, the processing for control start has a larger processing load than the processing for control update as described above. Therefore, if a large number of individual images to be controlled start exist in one processing, the completion of the task processing will not be completed. There is a possibility that processing will be missed in time. On the other hand, the processes of steps S2008 to S2011 are executed, and the control start timings are distributed so that a large number of individual images to be controlled do not exist in one process. It does not occur.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the individual image once controlled is not displayed within a predetermined number of frames, such as a position outside the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. Is excluded from the control target. When it becomes necessary to control the individual image again, the control starting process is performed again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, how each individual image becomes a control target in the task processing will be described. 45 (a) and 45 (b) are explanatory views for explaining a situation in which each individual image is a control target, and FIG. 45 (a) shows a case where viewpoint switching is not performed, and FIG. ) Indicates a case where viewpoint switching is performed.

  When viewpoint switching is not performed, the drawing range PL2 is fixed as shown in FIG. In this case, the individual images PC1 to PC3 included in the drawing range PL2 are subject to control start at a timing prior to the timing shown in FIG. 45A, so only the control update processing is executed.

  On the other hand, since the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 that are outside the drawing range PL2 but are included in the control target range PL3 are not yet control targets, these individual image PC4 and individual image PC5 are included in the control start target. Will be done. However, if the processing load increases when the control start processing is performed on both individual images PC4 and PC5, the control start processing is preferentially performed on the individual image PC4 close to the drawing range PL2, The control start processing for the image PC 5 is performed in the next task processing. Further, the individual image PC6 and the individual image PC7, which are included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 but outside the control target range PL3, are not included in the control start target, and the control start process is not executed.

  When there are a plurality of individual targets outside the drawing range PL2 as control start targets, the control start process is executed with priority from the side closer to the drawing range PL2. As a result, in the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed, the frequency at which the control start processing is executed at the timing when at least a part of the drawing range PL2 is included is reduced.

  When viewpoint switching is performed, as shown in FIG. 45B, in the previous task processing, the drawing range PL2 was the first position divided by the alternate long and two short dashes line. By the processing, the drawing range PL2 is displaced to the second position defined by the solid line. In this case, a part of the drawing range PL2 at the second position is included in the drawing range PL2 at the first position, and accordingly, the individual image PC8 becomes the first at the time of the previous task processing. Since at least a part of the drawing range PL2 at the position is included, it is already a control target. Therefore, in this task processing, it is not necessary to execute the control start processing for the individual image PC8.

  On the other hand, since the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10 are newly included in the drawing range PL2 displaced to the second position, the control start process is given priority over both the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10. Is executed and is controlled. In this case, the individual image PC11 is newly included in the control target range for the drawing range PL2 at the second position, but the control start process is executed with priority for each of the individual images PC9, PC10. , This time, it is excluded from the control start target.

  Even if the control start timing is distributed, if the control start processing needs to be performed on the individual images included in the drawing range PL2, that is, included in the image for one frame, the control start processing is It is prioritized and never delayed. As a result, the inconvenience that an individual image that should originally be included in the image for one frame is not included does not occur.

  In particular, in a configuration in which an effect is switched such that the viewpoint is switched when the player operates the effect operation device 48, an individual image that has not been a control target until then may suddenly become a control target. It can happen. On the other hand, as described above, the control start processing is executed with priority for the individual image included in the image for one frame, so that the viewpoint switching effect can be produced without causing the inconvenience as described above. It can perform well.

  The configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to the configuration in which all the individual images included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are subject to control start in the display CPU 72. In this case, the individual images included in the drawing range are given the highest priority as the control start target, and the individual images in the entire range are set as the control start target while giving priority to the side closer to the drawing range next. Thus, it is possible to start the control in advance for individual images in a wider range than that of the above configuration while satisfactorily distributing the control start timing.

  However, in this configuration, the number of individual images to be controlled and updated in the display CPU 72 is greater than that in the above configuration, and thus the processing load of the processing for control and updating at each processing time increases. In order to reduce the processing load of the processing for control updating, it is preferable that a part of the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as the control start target as in the above-described configuration.

  Further, the drawing range switching destination may be predetermined. In this configuration, the control start processing of the individual image to be included in the drawing range of the switching destination may be performed in advance at a timing before the switching becomes possible or at a timing before that. . As a result, even if the drawing range is switched at an arbitrary timing, it can be dealt with.

  Further, the configuration in which the control start timing is dispersed as described above may be applied to the configuration in which the drawing range is not switched. In this case, since the presence / absence of the control start target may be determined based on the fixed drawing range, the processing configuration for performing the confirmation can be simplified. In the present configuration, as the individual image that is the control start target at the timing when it is displayed on the display screen G, for example, an individual image that is displayed so as to move in the depth direction of the display screen G can be considered.

  Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the display mode of the background image, the design, and the like is changed based on the operation of the operation device for production 48. Even in this case, the control start timing can be well dispersed.

<Structure for displaying scroll background image>
Next, a configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a scroll background image is set as a kind of background image. The scroll background image is a background image displayed so as to scroll and change in a predetermined direction, specifically, in the horizontal direction with the passage of time. The scroll background image is set to have a background image for a plurality of frames in the scroll direction. Further, the scroll background image has a start point portion and an end point portion, but the image of the start point portion is set to have continuity with the image of the end point portion. When the scroll background image reaches the end point portion as a result of the scroll display, the start point portion is continuously displayed. That is, the scroll background image is repeatedly displayed in a circular manner.

  Background data PD1 for scroll is set as image data for displaying a scroll background image. The background data PD1 for scroll will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the scroll background data PD1.

  The background data PD1 for scrolling is still image data, and as shown in FIG. 46A, the size in the vertical direction is set for one frame or larger, and the size in the horizontal direction, which is the scroll direction, is , Are set so as to correspond to a plurality of frames. The scroll background data PD1 is not set as one image data but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided part data PD2 to PD10. These divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so as to divide the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction, and the scroll background data PD1 is configured by arranging the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction.

  The contents of the images set in the divided part data PD2 to PD10 are different from each other. However, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction is set so that the content of the image has continuity in the scroll direction.

  The divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so that the size in the vertical direction and the size in the horizontal direction are the same. In this case, the size in the horizontal direction is set smaller than one frame, and in order to form a background image for one frame, it is a part of the divided part data PD2 to PD10, and a plurality of divided part data are set side by side. There is a need to. Specifically, in the case of setting the divided part data with the default size, it is possible to form a background image for one frame by arranging two or three divided part data in the horizontal direction. The size is set. The background image for one frame may be formed by always arranging three pieces of divided part data or by arranging four or more pieces of divided part data. It may have a configuration capable of forming an image.

  Further, the divided part data adjacent to each other in the scroll direction are set to overlap each other at the boundary portion. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction will be described as an example.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (b) and 46 (c), each pixel forming one line in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction at the end point of the divided part data PD5 on the scroll destination side, and the pixels on the rear side of the scroll. Coordinates in the scrolling direction are set to the same coordinates as the pixels forming one line in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scrolling direction at the start point portion of the divided part data PD6 when drawing in the frame regions 82a and 82b. The same data is set in each line. When both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are drawn, the lines overlap each other. That is, the overlapping area PA1 is set at the boundary between the divided part data PD5 and PD6 that are adjacent in the scroll direction.

  The effect of setting the overlapping area PA1 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a-1) and (a-2) show divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set, and FIGS. 47 (b-1) and (b-2) show the overlapping area PA1 being set. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 that have not been created are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b-1), in the case of divided part data in which the overlapping area PA1 is not set, when both divided part data are enlarged from the default size and drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, FIG. As shown in b-2), a gap may occur at the boundary between the two divided part data. For example, when enlarging the divided part data, the above-described phenomenon occurs due to the content of the linear interpolation executed when each pixel of the divided part data after enlargement is associated with each dot of the frame regions 82a and 82b. Then, since the drawing data is not set for the dots in the gaps as described above, the ground color is displayed on the dots on the display screen G. Then, it is not preferable in appearance.

  On the other hand, in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set as shown in FIG. 47 (a-1), both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are enlarged from the size of the initial setting to the frame area. Even when drawn on 82a and 82b, as shown in FIG. 47 (a-2), there is no gap because the overlapping area PA1 exists at the boundary between the two divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, it is possible to display an image using the divided part data PD5 and PD6 without causing the above inconvenience.

  Further, a portion forming one overlapping area PA1 is a pixel for one line in each divided part data PD5, PD6. As a result, the data capacity allocated to provide the overlapping area PA1 can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In addition, the same data is set in the parts forming one overlapping area PA1 in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, when the divided part data PD5 and PD6 are individually enlarged and set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, even if the overlapping parts of the two parts are slightly deviated, the deviated parts are within the same data range. A shift will occur, and even in this case, a good display mode can be obtained.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the scroll background executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the scroll background is executed by the background calculation processing in step S2015 in the task processing (FIG. 44). Further, the calculation processing for the scroll background is started when information about the scroll background is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2101, the scroll position information is updated. The scroll position information is information for specifying which area in the scroll background image is displayed on the display screen G. The scroll position information is determined by the numerical information of the scroll counter provided in the work RAM 73. A large number of frame portions included in the scroll background image have a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value of the scroll position information. In step S2101, the numerical information of the scroll counter is updated so that 1 is added.

  In the following step S2102, the scale of the background image this time is grasped. In the following step S2103, the divided part data included in the display range is grasped by referring to the scroll position information updated in step S2101 and the scale grasped in step S2102. In this case, at least two pieces of divided part data are grasped. By the way, the control start processing for these divided parts data has already been completed.

  In the following step S2104, of the divided part data grasped in step S2103, the coordinates of the divided part data on the scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived coordinates is associated with the divided part data in the work RAM 73. Then, the control information is updated by writing in the secured area.

  In a succeeding step S2105, as coordinates of the next divided part data, coordinates for generating an overlapping area with respect to the adjacent divided part data on the scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and information of the derived coordinates is stored in the work RAM 73. In, the control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the divided part data.

  In a succeeding step S2106, it is determined whether or not the coordinates are grasped for all the divided part data grasped in the step S2103. If there is unidentified divided part data, the process of step S2105 is executed for the divided part data. If there is no unrecognized divided part data, the process advances to step S2107.

  In step S2107, the parameter information other than the size and the coordinates is updated for the divided part data acquired in step S2103. After that, in step S2108, the scroll background designating information is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

  When the above process is executed, the divided part data grasped in step S2103 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Also, scroll background designation information is set in this drawing list.

  Next, the setting process of the divided part data executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The divided part data setting process is executed by the content grasping process of step S1904 in the drawing process (FIG. 42). The divided part data setting process is started when the scroll background designation is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S2201, the type of the divided part data to be drawn and the addresses to which the divided part data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. After that, in step S2202, the scale of each divided part data is grasped, in step S2203 the coordinates of each divided part data are grasped, and in step S2204, other parameters are grasped, and then this setting process is ended.

  By executing the setting process of the divided part data, in the subsequent writing process (step S1905), each of the divided part data is applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn with the above parameters applied. Is drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that a background image using each of the divided part data is displayed on the display screen G.

  Here, a part of the divided part data to be drawn is out of the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. For example, as shown in FIG. 46A, when three pieces of divided part data PD2 to PD4 are drawn in a region PL4 for one frame divided by a two-dot chain line, in each divided part data PD2 to PD4. There is a portion protruding from the area PL4 for one frame. In the VDP 76, when drawing image data in the frame areas 82a and 82b, it is not possible to extract only some pixels and draw them. Therefore, although the protruding portion is not written in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the same processing as the processing executed when drawing the protruding portion in the frame areas 82a and 82b is executed for the pixels of the protruding portion. It

  As described above, the scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, so that the size that can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 102 is set excessively large. There is no need to do it. Also, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time will be lengthened, but since it can be transferred in units of divided parts data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

  Further, the VDP 76 also executes the drawing process on the portions protruding from the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the same manner as the portions not protruding, but when the scrolling background data is used as a single image data, it protrudes. Since there are many places, the processing load increases. On the other hand, by using only the divided part data including at least a part of the frame regions 82a and 82b, the protruding portion is suppressed and the processing load can be reduced. Further, the display CPU 72 does not derive the parameter information for the divided part data that is not the display target. As a result, the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced.

  Further, by setting the divided part data to be small and increasing the divided part data used in each frame, it is possible to suppress the portion protruding from the frame regions 82a and 82b. As a result, the amount of image data for which the parameters are calculated increases, and the processing load on the display CPU 72 increases. On the other hand, since the size of each divided part data is set such that the number of divided part data used in each frame is 2-3, the processing load of the display CPU 72 can be suppressed.

  The scroll direction is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction.

  Also, when focusing on the effect that the data capacity of a single image data can be suppressed, a configuration in which a plurality of divided part data are set as image data for displaying a series of images may be essential. , The divided part data may not have the overlapping area PA1. In this case, if the individual size adjustment of each divided part data is not performed, the possibility that a gap will occur is reduced.

  Further, the overlapping area PA1 may not be composed of the pixels of one column but may be composed of the pixels of a plurality of columns. In this case, although the data capacity assigned to the overlapping area PA1 increases, it is possible to more reliably prevent the occurrence of the gap. Further, the same data may not be set in the portion forming one overlapping area PA1.

<Structure for displaying displacement background image of small unit group>
Next, a configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a displacement background image of a small unit group is set as a kind of background image. The displacement background image of the small unit group is a background image displayed in front of the rearmost image so that a large number of small unit images are displaced in a predetermined direction with the passage of time. An image of a flower flyer is set as this small unit image, but the image is not limited to this, and an image of rain or an image of snow may be set.

  Background data PD11 for small unit group is set as image data for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group. The background data PD11 for the small unit group will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small unit group background data PD11.

  The small unit group background data PD11 is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 as shown in FIG. Each of these divided data groups PD12 to PD15 has a plurality (for example, four) of divided part data.

  The divided data groups PD12 to PD15 have the same number of divided part data, and the order of reading in order to display an image of one frame in each divided data group PD12 to PD15 is predetermined. That is, by arranging the divided part data set as the first order in each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 at the corresponding positions, the displacement background image for one frame is displayed and the next order is displayed. The displaced background images for the next frame are displayed by arranging the respective divided part data set as “1” at the corresponding positions. Then, this is sequentially performed for each combination in each order.

  Data for a plurality of small unit images is set in each divided part data. The mode of setting the data for these small unit images differs for each divided part data, and the combination of each divided part data is sequentially selected in the above-mentioned predetermined order. As shown, each of the small unit images is displayed so as to be displaced in a predetermined direction with the passage of time.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the displacement background executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the displacement background is executed by the background calculation processing in step S2015 in the task processing (FIG. 44).

  First, in step S2301, the value of the parts counter for specifying the order of the divided parts data corresponding to the current frame is updated. This parts counter is provided in the work RAM 73. In the following step S2302, the divided data group to be set is grasped. When grasping this, the target counter provided in the work RAM 73 is referred to.

  In the following step S2303, the divided part data to be controlled is grasped from the information of the order shown in the parts counter and the information of the divided data group to be shown in the target counter. In the following step S2304, the parameter of the divided part data grasped in step S2303 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to the divided part data. Information for

  In a succeeding step S2305, it is determined whether or not setting of all the divided part data corresponding to the current order is completed. If the setting has not been completed, the target counter is updated in step S2306 to update the setting target to the next divided data group, and then the processes in step S2302 and subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, if the setting is completed, the displacement background designating information is stored in step S2307, and then the calculation process for the displacement background is completed.

  When the above process is executed, each divided part data corresponding to the current order is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Further, displacement background designation information is set in the drawing list. Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 76 draws each divided part data in the frame areas 82a and 82b according to the drawing list. Then, the output of the drawing list and the corresponding drawing are repeatedly performed for each frame, so that the animation as shown in FIG. 50B is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, when displaying an animation for displacing a small unit group, instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite, a plurality of small unit images are sequentially switched to a set still image. Since the configuration is controlled, the processing load of the parameter calculation processing in the display CPU 72 is reduced. Therefore, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

  The number of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 and the number of divided part data assigned to each divided data group PD12 to PD15 are arbitrary as long as they are plural.

  Further, the divided part data may not be assigned to each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15, and a common divided data group in which a large number of divided part data are set may be provided. In this case, the divided part data may be distributed to each divided position from the common divided data group.

<Addition processing of effect images>
Next, the effect image addition processing will be described with reference to FIG. 52A to 52E are explanatory diagrams for explaining the addition processing of the effect image.

  The effect image is an image showing a blast, an image showing water droplets, a light emission image showing how light is emitted from the light source to the surroundings, and an aura image showing as if the surroundings of the character are emitting light. In addition, it is an image for enhancing the visual effect. Of these effect images, an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, and the like are not limited to be applied, but the aura image is applied to a predetermined sprite.

  More specifically, the effect data PD17 is set as shown in FIG. 52 (b) in correspondence with the sprite data PD16 as shown in FIG. 52 (a). The sprite data PD16 includes an image area PA2 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA3 surrounding the image area PA2, and is defined as a rectangular shape as a whole. There is. On the other hand, the effect data PD17 is defined along the outer edge of the image area PA2, and the effect area PA4 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image and the effect area PA4 to have a rectangular shape as a whole. And a frame area PA5 that defines the inside and the outside.

  Incidentally, the sprite data PD16 and the corresponding effect data PD17 are defined so as to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. In addition, since information of “0”, which is completely transparent information, is set as the α value in the pixels forming the frame areas PA3 and PA5, the pixels are not displayed on the display screen G, and the image area PA2 and The effect area PA4 is a display target on the display screen G. However, the frame areas PA3 and PA5 may be hidden by using dedicated α data. Details of the α data will be described later.

  By applying the effect data PD17 to the sprite data PD16, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), an effect image CH2 as if the surroundings of the character CH1 are emitting light is generated. . In this case, the effect image CH2 overlaps a part of the background image in front of it. On the other hand, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are individually set, it is possible to display the character CH1 alone.

  As described above, the frame areas 82a and 82b in which the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and each unit area is set with an area for storing color information. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), in each unit area 121, color information storage areas 121a to 121c each consisting of 1 byte are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. , RGB can be set to 256 colors.

  The smaller the value of the numerical value information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c, the darker the color of RGB is finally displayed, and black is displayed in the case of the minimum value. Further, as the value of the numerical information is larger, the color of the lighter degree in RGB is finally displayed, and when the value is the maximum, white is displayed. It should be noted that the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors instead of the full color system.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (e), color information consisting of numerical information is set to each pixel 122 of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 as well, using a palette table or the like. In this case, the color information set in each of the pixels 122 is not full color but data capable of displaying only 256 colors. However, in order to allow good drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b, each color of RGB can be displayed. In, each is set as information within the range of 1 byte.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set by 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in the configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, each pixel 122 The color information may also be set in 1 byte.

  Further, in addition to the above color information, α value information is set in each pixel 122. A storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as the α value information, but in practice, numerical information of any one of “0 to 100” in decimal is set. Further, the α value information is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1”, and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

  When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 of the drawing target, the numerical information obtained by integrating the α value with respect to each numerical information of RGB in each pixel 122 is used for storing the color information in the unit area 121. The areas 121a to 121c are stored in areas corresponding to RGB. In this case, when the α value is set as opaque information of “1”, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten on the corresponding unit area 121 as it is. On the other hand, when the α value is less than 1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed between the image to be overlaid on the back side of the display screen G and the calculation result is stored in the unit area 121. Written.

  In the case of the effect data PD17, an α value less than 1 is set for all pixels. Specifically, all pixels included in the frame area PA5 are set to complete transparency information with an α value of “0”, and each pixel included in the effect area PA4 is semi-transparent with 0 <α value <1. Information is set. When the effect data PD17 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, an α value is set for the numerical information of each pixel of the effect data PD17 for each unit area 121 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The accumulated results are added.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying an image using the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for the first effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the first effect effect is executed by the effect calculation processing in step S2016 in the task process (FIG. 44). Further, the calculation process for the first effect effect is activated when the information about the first effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2401, the sprite data PD16 included in the display area is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2402, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 grasped in step S2401 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the sprite data PD16. Information for

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the effect data should be applied. When it is not necessary to apply the effect data, this operation processing is ended as it is.

  When the arithmetic processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the sprite data PD16 is a drawing target, and drawing including the parameter information of the sprite data PD16 is executed. A list is created and sent to VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is necessary to apply the effect data PD17, the effect data PD17 to be applied this time is grasped in step S2404. In the following step S2405, the same coordinates as the coordinates of the sprite data PD16 to be applied in step S2402 are grasped as the coordinates of the effect data PD17, and the area reserved in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is grasped. The information for control is updated by writing.

  In a succeeding step S2406, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the parameter information other than the coordinates for the effect data PD17 and writing the derived parameter information in the secured area. In this case, if the size and rotation angle of the sprite data PD16 to be applied have been changed from those at the time of initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD17 are adjusted so as to be the same. After that, after the effect designation information is stored in step S2407, the present calculation processing ends.

  When the calculation processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a drawing list in which both the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are set as drawing targets is created. To be done. Further, the drawing list includes parameter information of each of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 and effect designation information indicating that the effect data PD17 should be applied. Then, the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the first effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the first effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1904 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). In addition, the setting process for the first effect effect is started when the designation relating to the first effect effect is set in the drawing list.

  In step S2501, the present sprite data PD16 shown in the drawing list and the address to which the sprite data PD16 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In the following step S2502, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 are grasped.

  In a succeeding step S2503, it is determined whether or not the effect designation information is set in the drawing list in association with the sprite data PD16. If the effect designation information has not been set, this setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the effect designation information is set, in step S2504, the effect data PD17 to be drawn is grasped together with the sprite data PD16, and the effect data PD17 is transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM75. Know which address you have. After that, in step S2505, after the parameters of the effect data PD17 are grasped, this setting process is ended.

  That is, the effect data PD17 is set in association with the application target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list, and is processed at the same time in the processing times for processing the application target sprite data PD16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect data PD17 may be set independently of the application target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list. Even in this case, since the parameters are set for the effect data PD17 alone as described above, it is possible to draw the effect data PD17 in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b.

  By the way, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are handled separately, as described above, the same sprite data PD16 can be used to display the character CH1 alone corresponding to the sprite data PD16. In addition to that, the character CH1 to which the effect image CH2 is applied can be displayed.

  By executing the setting process for the first effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S1905), the sprite data PD16 in the state where the above parameters are applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. And the effect data PD17 are drawn.

  Next, the first effect addition processing executed by the VDP 76 when the effect data PD17 is drawn will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a flow chart showing the first effect addition processing, and FIG. 55 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the first effect addition processing. The first effect addition process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S1905 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, the first effect addition processing is activated when the effect data PD17 is set.

  First, in step S2601, a target pixel update process is executed. In the target pixel update processing, processing for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the effect data PD17 is executed. Specifically, the pixel updating counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In the following step S2602, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) in which the current target pixel is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read and grasped. In this case, as shown by "r1", "g1", and "b1" in FIG. 55 (b-1), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

  In the following step S2603, the numerical information set in the target pixel of this time in the effect data PD17 is grasped. This numerical value information is each numerical value information obtained as a result of integrating the numerical value information of α value with respect to each numerical value information of RGB. That is, each numerical value information of RGB is grasped as shown by “α × r2”, “α × g2”, and “α × b2” in FIG. 55 (b-2).

  In addition, in the integration, an operation is performed so that the α value defined as a decimal value “0 to 100” functions as “0.00 to 1.00” which is a value of 1 or less, Furthermore, the value is rounded down or rounded off so that the value after the decimal point is not included in the integration result. The handling of the α value and the handling of numerical values below the decimal point are the same in the following description. Further, the α value is defined as a decimal value of “0 to 10”, and the calculation is performed so that it functions as “0.0 to 1.0” which is a value of 1 or less. Good.

  In subsequent step S2604, the RGB numerical value information acquired in step S2602 and the RGB numerical value information acquired in step S2603 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 55 (b-3), each numerical value information of RGB becomes “r1 + α × r2”, “g1 + α × g2”, “b1 + α × b2”. In the following step S2605, each numerical value information of RGB calculated in step S2604 is written in the current target dot.

  After that, in step S2606, it is determined whether drawing is completed for all pixels of the effect data PD17. If not completed, the processes of steps S2601 to S2605 are repeated. If it has been completed, this addition processing is terminated.

  By performing the addition processing, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is reflected in the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image CH2 is an image that allows a deeper object such as light or water droplets to pass through, so that it is uncomfortable when displayed regardless of the background image. On the other hand, by performing the addition processing as described above, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, which is preferable in appearance without causing the discomfort. Become.

  It should be noted that the specific process of reflecting the individual image on the back side when displaying the individual image on the front side is not limited to the addition process, and other calculation process can be performed as long as the reflection can be performed well. May be executed.

  Further, after the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is set in the frame regions 82a and 82b, the addition process of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side to the frame regions 82a and 82b is executed. Alternatively, the image data resulting from the addition process may be set in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

<Partial addition processing of effect image>
Next, the partial addition processing of the effect image will be described.

  When the effect image is applied as described above, the addition process is executed. However, if the bright effect image is also overlaid on the bright image, the RGB numerical values in the unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b. There is a case where the information becomes the maximum value and the display becomes white, which is out of the designer's intention (so-called whiteout). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, partial addition is performed when a predetermined effect image is displayed in order to suppress the occurrence of the overexposure.

  Regarding the data structure for performing the partial addition, an effect that is treated independently of the character's sprite data, such as an image showing a blast or an image showing water droplets, will be taken as an example and refer to FIG. While explaining. FIG. 56 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure for performing partial addition.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a-1), the effect data PD18 to which the partial addition is applied includes an effect area PA6 which is a target to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image including a plurality of pixels, and a rectangular area as a whole. A frame area PA7 that defines the periphery of the effect area PA6 so as to have a shape. As described above, each pixel forming the effect area PA6 has color information having numerical information corresponding to each of RGB and information of an α value accumulated with respect to each numerical information of the color information. It is set. It should be noted that "0", which is complete transparency information, is set as an α value in each pixel that configures the frame area PA7.

  Partial addition data PD19 defined in a one-to-one correspondence with the effect data PD18 so that the size and outer shape at the time of initialization are the same as the effect data PD18, as shown in FIG. 56 (a-2). Is set. The partial addition data PD19 has an effect-corresponding area PA8 defined so as to have the same shape and the same number of pixels as the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, and the periphery of the effect-corresponding area PA8 so as to have a rectangular shape as a whole. And a frame corresponding area PA9 that defines

  Unlike the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, color information is not set in each pixel forming the effect corresponding area PA8, and only the α value information is set. By the way, the α value information set for each pixel is individually set according to the execution target of partial addition, and if there are pixels for which the same α value information is set for each pixel, There are also pixels for which different α value information is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the α value set for each pixel may be the same.

  When partial addition is performed, the partial addition data PD19 is first applied to each dot (that is, each unit area) in which the effect data PD18 is drawn in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. After that, the effect data PD18 is drawn for each dot. A specific processing configuration for performing the drawing will be described below.

  FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the second effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the second effect effect is executed in the effect operation processing in step S2016 in the task process (FIG. 44). Further, the calculation process for the second effect effect is activated when the information about the second effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2701, the effect data PD18 to be drawn this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2702, the parameters of the effect data PD18 grasped in step S2701 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the effect data PD18. Information for

  In the following step S2703, the partial addition data PD19 to be applied this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2704, the same coordinates as the coordinates obtained for the effect data PD18 to be applied in step S2702 are grasped as the coordinates of the partial addition data PD19, and the information of the grasped coordinates is stored in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the work data PD19.

  In the following step S2705, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the information of parameters other than the coordinates for the partial addition data PD19 and writing the derived parameter information in the secured area. In this case, when the size and the rotation angle of the effect data PD18 to be applied are changed from those at the initial setting, the size and the rotation angle of the partial addition data PD19 are adjusted so as to be the same as those. . After that, after the partial addition designation information is stored in step S2706, the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

  When the calculation processing for the second effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the drawing list in which both the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19 are set as drawing targets Is created. Further, the drawing list includes parameter information of each of the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19, and partial addition designation information indicating that the partial addition data PD19 should be applied. The created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the second effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the second effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1904 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, the setting process for the second effect effect is activated when the partial addition designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S2801, the partial addition data PD19 to be applied this time shown in the drawing list and the address to which the partial addition data PD19 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In a succeeding step S2802, the parameter of the data PD19 for partial addition is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S2803, the effect data PD18 to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list and the address to which the effect data PD18 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. After that, in step S2804, after the parameters of the effect data PD18 are grasped, this setting process is ended.

  That is, the partial addition data PD19 is set in association with the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list, and is processed at the same time in the processing times for processing the effect data PD18 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the partial addition data PD19 may be set independently of the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list. In this case, since the parameter is set only for the partial addition data PD19, if the drawing order is set so that the partial addition data PD19 is processed before the effect data PD18, the partial addition is performed. It is possible to appropriately draw the work data PD19 in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b.

  By executing the setting process for the second effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S1905), the partial addition is performed with the above parameters applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. The data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn.

  Next, the second effect addition processing executed by the VDP 76 when the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn will be described. FIG. 58A is a flow chart showing the second effect addition processing, and FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the second effect addition processing. The second effect addition process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S1905 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, the second effect addition processing is activated when the partial addition data PD19 is set.

  First, in step S2901, a target pixel update process is executed. In the update process of the target pixel, a process for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 is executed. Specifically, the pixel updating counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In the following step S2902, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) in which the target pixel of this time is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b is read and grasped. In this case, each numerical value information of RGB is grasped as shown by "r3", "g3", and "b3" in FIG. 58 (b-1).

  In a succeeding step S2903, the α value set in the current target pixel in the partial addition data PD19 is grasped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (b-2), “α1” is set as the α value.

  In a succeeding step S2904, the α value grasped in step S2903 is integrated with each numerical information of RGB grasped in step S2902. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (b-3), the RGB numerical information corresponding to the integration result becomes "α1 × r3", "α1 × g3", and "α1 × b3".

  In the following step S2905, the numerical information set in the target pixel this time in the effect data PD18 is grasped. This numerical value information is each numerical value information obtained by integrating the numerical value information of RGB with the numerical value information of the α value predetermined for the pixel. That is, as shown in FIG. 58 (b-4), each numerical value information of RGB is “α2 × r4”, “α2 × g4”, “α2 × b4”.

  In subsequent step S2906, the RGB numerical value information acquired in step S2905 and the RGB integration result information acquired in step S2904 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (b-6), each numerical value information of RGB becomes “α1 × r3 + α2 × r4”, “α1 × g3 + α2 × g4”, “α1 × b3 + α2 × b4”. In subsequent step S2907, each numerical value information of RGB calculated in step S2906 is written in the current target dot.

  Then, in step S2908, it is determined whether or not drawing has been completed for all pixels of the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18. If not completed, the processes of steps S2901 to S2907 are repeated. If it has been completed, this addition processing is terminated.

  After the addition processing is executed, the numerical information already stored in the unit area in which the effect data PD18 is drawn is reduced to a numerical value at the rate of the α value of the partial addition data PD19. The numerical value information of the result obtained by adding the numerical value information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical value information of is set. As a result, after drawing the effect data PD18, it is possible to prevent each numerical value information of RGB in the unit area of the frame regions 82a and 82b from becoming maximum values, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of blown-out highlights.

  Further, for example, when the numerical value information or the α value of the effect data PD18 is suppressed, the effect image is made to fit the image to be superimposed, and the effect image cannot enhance the visual effect. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the images on the superimposed side is suppressed by the partial addition data PD19, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure while enhancing the effect image.

  Also, it is conceivable to set the numerical information of the images to be superimposed in a state where the numerical information is originally suppressed. Then, when the image is used without application of the effect image, it corresponds to the numerical information. You are limited to color information. On the other hand, by separately setting the partial addition data PD19 as described above, it becomes difficult for the restriction of the images on the superimposing side to occur.

  Further, since the partial addition data PD19 is configured such that the numerical information corresponding to the color information is not set and the numerical information corresponding to the α value is set, the data capacity of the partial addition data PD19 is the effect. It is smaller than the data PD18. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

  A method other than the method of applying the partial addition data PD19 may be adopted as a method for reducing the ratio of reflecting the individual image on the back side. For example, in the configuration in which the α value of the image data can be manipulated in pixel units in the processing of the VDP 76, the numerical information in the corresponding portion of the individual image on the back side in the processing of the VDP 76 is reduced at a predetermined rate. Good.

  In addition, in the individual image on the back side, even a position other than the overlapping position with the individual image on the front side is affected, but a uniform α value for partial addition is set for the individual image on the back side. Conceivable.

  Further, in the configuration in which the limit numerical values of the frame regions 82a and 82b are the darkest and the minimum numerical value is the brightest, in order to reflect the individual image on the back side to the individual image on the front side, instead of the addition processing described above. , Subtraction processing needs to be executed. Further, in order to suppress overexposure, it is necessary to apply partial subtraction data in place of the partial addition data PD19.

Further, instead of the above configuration, the partial addition data PD19 may have a configuration in which not only the α value but also numerical information corresponding to the color information is set. In this case, in step S2903 of the second effect addition processing, the α value and the numerical value information of the target pixel in the partial addition data are grasped, and in step S2904, the processing for fusion is executed instead of the integration processing. . Specifically, when the α value of the partial addition data PD19 is set to α1 and the color information of the partial addition data PD19 is set to “r5, g5, b5”, in step S2904,
R: r3 × (1-α1) + r5 × α1
G: g3 × (1-α1) + g5 × α1
B: b3 × (1-α1) + b5 × α1
The fusion operation is performed.

Then, by performing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 on the calculation result,
R: r3 × (1-α1) + r5 × α1 + α2 × r4
G: g3 × (1-α1) + g5 × α1 + α2 × g4
B: b3 × (1-α1) + b5 × α1 + α2 × b4
Becomes

  Even when using the partial addition data PD19 in which the numerical information corresponding to the color information is set as described above, the timing before the effect data is drawn is executed by executing the processing of the fusion operation. Since the numerical information already stored in is reduced in numerical value, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of whiteout.

<Composite data that combines multiple effect images>
Next, a configuration for creating composite data in which a plurality of effect images are combined will be described.

  As described above, in order to enhance the visual effect, a plurality of effect images may be displayed in the image for one frame. For example, an image representing a blast and a luminescent image may be displayed at the same time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of separately storing each effect data originally set individually in a combined and combined state. A specific process for creating the combined data and a specific process for using the combined data will be described below.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the multiple effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for multiple effect effects is executed by the effect operation processing in step S2016 in the task processing (FIG. 44). Further, the arithmetic processing for the multiple effect effect is started when information about the multiple effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the composite data has been created in the VDP 76. The determination is performed by determining whether or not a flag for determination of completion of creation is set in the work RAM 73, but the present invention is not limited to this, and composite data is created in the currently set data table. The configuration may be such that information on whether or not it has been completed is set.

  If the composite data has not been created, in step S3002, a plurality of effect data to be applied this time are grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S3003, the parameters of each effect data grasped in step S3002 are calculated and derived, and information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to each of these effect data. Information for In a succeeding step S3004, the plural effect effect designation information is stored.

  In a succeeding step S3005, it is determined whether or not it is a synthetic data generation timing. Specifically, a plurality of types of timings at which a plurality of effect effects are performed are set, and at each of these timings, a timing when the number of individual images other than the effect image is relatively large and a processing load on the VDP 76 is large, There is a timing when the number of individual images other than images is relatively small and the processing load on the VDP 76 is small. The generation timing of the synthetic data is a timing when the processing load is small.

  When it is determined that it is not the timing to create the composite data (step S3005: NO), the present arithmetic processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that it is the time to create the composite data (step S3005: YES), the composite data creation designation information is stored in step S3006, and then the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

  When the arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a plurality of sprite data are drawing targets and a drawing list including parameter information of these sprite data. Is created. In addition, the drawing list includes multi-effect effect designation information that is information indicating that the multi-effect effect should be executed. Further, when the synthetic data creation designation information is stored, the drawing list includes synthetic data creation designation information that is information indicating that synthetic data should be created.

  On the other hand, if the synthetic data has been created (step S3001: YES), the synthetic data to be applied this time is grasped in step S3007. In the following step S3008, the parameters of the combined data obtained in step S3007 are calculated and obtained.

  In subsequent step S3009, the additional effect data is grasped based on the information set as the case where the synthetic data is already created in the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S3010, the parameter of the additional effect data grasped in step S3009 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the additional effect data for control. Update information on. That is, when the composite data is applied, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 have an extra processing time for drawing. Therefore, the additional effect data is set using the processing time.

  After that, the plural effect effect designation information is stored in step S3011, and the combined data use designation information is stored in step S3012, and then the present calculation process is ended.

  When the arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the combined data and the additional effect data are objects to be drawn, and the combined data and the additional effect data A drawing list including parameter information is created. In addition, the drawing list includes a plurality of effect effect designation information and also includes synthesized data use designation information that is information indicating that the synthesized data should be used.

  Next, the setting process for multiple effect effects executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for multiple effect effects is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1904 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, when the multiple effect effect designation is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the multiple effect effect is activated.

  In step S3101, it is determined whether or not synthetic data use designation is set in the drawing list. If the composite data use designation is not set, in step S3102, the plurality of effect data designated as the current drawing target and the addresses to which these effect data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are set. Figure out That is, when a plurality of effect data are drawn at the same time, these effect data are not set individually in the drawing list but are set to be processed simultaneously in one processing time.

  In a succeeding step S3103, the parameter of each effect data is grasped. After that, in step S3104, it is determined whether the composite data creation designation is set. When the composite data creation designation is not set, this setting process is ended as it is. If the composite data creation designation is set, the process advances to step S3105.

  In step S3105, composite data is created in a state in which the parameters grasped in step S3104 are applied to the plurality of effect data grasped in step S3102. Then, this setting process is completed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 60B, a combined data area 81c is set in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The combined data created in step S3105 is written in the combined data area 81c. The combined data area 81c stores and holds the written combined data while the power supply to the VRAM 75 is continued, and when another image data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the VRAM 75. Areas that are not subject to overwrite. Therefore, the synthesized data once created is stored and held until the power supply to the VRAM 75 is cut off.

  By executing the setting process for multiple effect effects as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S1905), the above-mentioned parameters are applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be rendered. Each of the above effect data is drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that the effect image using each of the effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

  On the other hand, if the composite data use designation is set in the drawing list (step S3101: YES), in step S3106, the composite data designated as the current drawing target and the composite data in the composite data area 81c are displayed. Figure out the address where is stored. In a succeeding step S3107, the parameter of the combined data is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S3108, the additional effect data designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the additional effect data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. That is, when the composite data and the additional effect data are drawn at the same time, the composite data and the additional effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set to be processed simultaneously in one processing time. Has been done. After that, in step S3109, after the parameters of the additional effect data are grasped, this setting process is ended.

  By executing the setting process for multiple effect effects as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S1905), the combined data is applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be rendered in the state where the parameters are applied. Is drawn, and additional effect data is drawn with the parameters applied. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that an effect image using the combined data and the additional effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, the composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the composite data is used in the subsequent use, so that the plurality of effect data are stored at each execution timing of the plurality of effect effects. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 as compared with the drawing configuration.

  In particular, since the display CPU 72 issues an instruction to create the composite data at a timing when the processing load on the VDP 76 is small, it is possible to create the composite data while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 76.

  Further, when a plurality of effect effects are executed using the combined data, an additional effect image using the additional effect data is displayed by utilizing the fact that processing time has a margin. As a result, more effect images can be applied, and the visual effect of the effect images can be enhanced.

  Further, the storage capacity required for the effect data in the NAND flash memory 102 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the synthetic data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance. Further, since the combined data is created by using the individually set effect data, the effect data can be used individually.

  Further, since the combined data is stored in the combined data area 81c after being created, after the combined data is created, the combined data can be used for a plurality of frames that are not continuous.

  In addition, the synthetic data is created in accordance with each effect data that constitutes the synthetic data, when it is used for display. As a result, it is not necessary to set the processing timing for creating the composite data independently of the image display.

  In addition, the synthetic data is created after the parameter information is applied to each of the effect data forming the synthetic data. As a result, when synthetic data is used, it is sufficient to derive and apply parameter information for the synthetic data, and it is not necessary to derive and apply parameter information for each effect data that constitutes the synthetic data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when using the synthetic data.

  It should be noted that, when a plurality of effect effects are executed using the combined data, the additional effect data may not be drawn. Even in this case, the synthetic data is created, so that the processing time in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be easily adjusted.

  Further, the combined data may be created at a timing different from the timing at which each effect data is used for display, such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

<Partial display of individual image using α data>
Next, a configuration for partially displaying an individual image using α data will be described.

  As described above, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of the background data and the sprite data, and is previously stored in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. The α data is individually set for image data that defines individual images such as background data and sprite data, but for the symbol sprite data, the whole α data and the partial α data are set respectively. Has been done.

  The whole α data and the partial α data will be described with reference to FIG. 61. 61 is an explanatory view for explaining α data, FIG. 61 (a) shows the symbol sprite data PD20 corresponding to a predetermined symbol, and FIG. 61 (b) is set in association with the symbol sprite data PD20. 61 (c) shows the case where the whole α data PD21 is applied to the symbol sprite data PD20, and FIGS. 61 (d) to (g) are associated with the symbol sprite data PD20. The set partial α data PD22 to PD25 are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the symbol sprite data PD20 includes an image area PA10 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA11 surrounding the perimeter of the image area PA10. The frame area PA11 enables the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to handle the symbol sprite data PD20 as image data defined in a rectangular shape regardless of the outer edge shape of the image area PA10, thereby facilitating designation of coordinates.

  As shown in FIG. 61B, the size of the overall α data PD21 is set so that its outer shape matches the design target sprite data PD20. The overall α data PD21 has an image corresponding area PA12 that occupies the inside of the outer edge portion and a frame corresponding area PA13 that occupies the outside of the outer edge portion, with the outer edge portion of the image area PA10 in the design target sprite data PD20 as a boundary. Is equipped with.

  For each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13, “0” which is the completely transparent information is set as the α value. On the other hand, each pixel included in a portion of the image corresponding area PA12 excluding the outer edge portion is set to opaque information "1" as the α value, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion is set as the α value. 0 <α value <1 which is partial transmission information is set.

  By applying the overall α data PD21 to the symbol sprite data PD20, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 is applied to each pixel included in the image area PA10, and the frame area PA11 is further applied. The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA 13 is applied to each pixel included in

  In this case, as described above, the size of the whole α data PD21 is set so that the outer shape thereof matches the design target sprite data PD20. Therefore, by setting the size and rotation angle of both data PD20 and 21 to be the same, and further setting both data PD20 and 21 so that the reference pixel such as the central one pixel overlaps, the overall α data PD21 of the pattern sprite data PD20 is It can be applied, and the processing load related to the setting can be reduced. The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

Further, when the pattern sprite data 20 to which the overall α data PD21 is applied is overlapped with the image data that overlaps on the back side of the display screen G, each dot relating to the overlay is determined by the overall α data PD21. Numerical information fusion (that is, blending) is performed based on the existing α value. In particular,
R: “R value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “R value of front side image” × “α value”
G: “G value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “G value of front side image” × “α value”
B: “B value of the back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “B value of the front side image” × “α value”
Becomes The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

  By applying the overall α data PD21, in the applied pattern CH3, the frame area PA11 is in a completely transparent state as shown in FIG. 61 (c), and only the image area PA10 is visible. In addition, jaggies that occur in the outline of the pattern CH3 are reduced, and the color can be smoothly changed so that the outline of the pattern CH3 is fused with the background. That is, it is possible to perform antialiasing.

  On the other hand, the sizes of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 are set such that the outer shape thereof matches the design target sprite data PD20 as shown in FIGS. 61 (d) to 61 (g). The partial α data PD22 to PD25 have a partial image corresponding area PA14 that occupies the inside of the outer edge portion with the outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image area PA10 in the design target sprite data PD20 as a boundary, and the outer edge portion. Corresponding area PA15 other than a part occupying the outside of the area.

  For each pixel included in the corresponding area PA15 other than a part, "0" which is complete transmission information is set as an α value. On the other hand, "1" which is opaque information is set as an α value in each pixel included in the part of the partial image corresponding area PA14 excluding the outer edge part, and α is set in each pixel included in the outer edge part. As the value, 0 <α value <1 which is the partial transmission information is set.

  The α data PD22 to PD25 for each part are different from each other in the part corresponding to the partial image corresponding area PA14 in the image area PA10 of the symbol sprite data PD20. Specifically, the partial α data PD22 of FIG. 61 (d) corresponds to the quarter of the destination side when the image area PA10 is variably displayed, and the partial α data PD22 of FIG. 61 (e) is used. The data PD23 corresponds to the half of the destination side, the partial α data PD24 of FIG. 61 (f) corresponds to the half of the source side, and the partial α data PD25 of FIG. 61 (g) advances. It corresponds to 1/4 of the original side.

  The partial α data PD22 to PD25 set for one symbol sprite data PD20 are not limited to four, and may be two, three, or five or more. Further, the number may be one. In addition, the combination of the above-mentioned whole α data and the plurality of partial α data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each type of symbol sprite data.

  By using the α data PD22 to PD25 for each part, it is possible to display a part of the symbol. Even when a partial display is performed in this way, jaggies that occur on the outline of the symbol are reduced within the range of the partial display, and the color changes smoothly so that the outline of the symbol merges with the background. It becomes possible. That is, it is possible to perform anti-aliasing even when displaying a part.

  Hereinafter, processing in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 when applying α data will be described.

  First, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the symbol calculation process is a process executed in step S2017 of the task process (FIG. 44), and calculates various parameters for the symbol to be displayed variably in each game. It is a process to derive.

  In step S3201, it is determined whether it is time to execute partial display. Whether or not it is the timing is determined by referring to the information designated by the current pointer in the currently set data table.

  If it is not time to execute partial display (partial display), in step S3202, the symbol sprite data to be controlled this time is grasped. In a succeeding step S3203, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the grasped symbol sprite data, and information of the derived various parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the symbol sprite data. The information for control is updated by writing in the designated area.

  In a succeeding step S3204, overall α data corresponding to each of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3202 is grasped. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps the information of the address to which each overall α data is transferred. After that, in step S3205, after the synthesis designation information is stored in the register, the present symbol calculation processing is ended.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3202 is the drawing target, and the parameter information of each of the symbol sprite data is further drawn. Then, a drawing list including the type and address of the α data for the whole and the synthesis designation information indicating that the α data for the whole should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is time to execute partial display (step S3201: YES), the coordinates and size of the partial display area are grasped in step S3206. The partial display area is an area displayed so as to partition a part of the display screen G (see the area partitioned by the frame indicated by the symbol PL5 in FIG. 63 (b)).

  In a succeeding step S3207, the symbol sprite data currently displayed on the display screen G including the partial display area is grasped. In the pachinko machine 10, when displaying the partial display area, the pattern is displayed only in the partial display area, and the background and the effect character are displayed outside the partial display area on the display screen G. Is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbols may be displayed outside the partial display area.

  In subsequent step S3208, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3207, and information of the derived various parameters is associated with the symbol sprite data in the work RAM 73. Then, the control information is updated by writing in the secured area. In this case, the size information is calculated so that the design displayed in the partial display area is displayed in a smaller size than the normal display state in the situation where the partial display area is not displayed.

  In a succeeding step S3209, it is determined whether or not the partial α data needs to be set. If it is necessary to set the partial α data, in step S3210, the partial α data corresponding to the pattern sprite data that needs to be set, and for the partial corresponding to the current drawing list creation target. Understand α data. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps the information of the address to which each partial α data is transferred.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3209 or after the processing of step S3210 is executed, it is determined in step S3211 whether or not the overall α data needs to be set. Even for the symbol sprites displayed in the partial display area, if the partial α data is not applicable, it is necessary to set the overall α data, and in this case, a positive determination is made in step S3211. do. When it is necessary to set the α data for the whole, the process of step S3204 is executed to grasp the α data for the whole.

  Regardless of whether or not the overall α data is grasped in step S3204, after finally synthesizing combination information is stored in step S3205, this symbol calculation processing is ended.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the partial display area should be set in addition to the information described as the case where only the whole α data is applied. A drawing list including information, parameter information of the partial display area, the type and address of the partial α data, and synthesis designation information indicating that the partial α data should be applied to the corresponding pattern sprite data is created. And transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the symbol sprite data setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63 (a). The setting process of the pattern sprite data is executed by the content grasping process executed in step S1904 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, the setting process of the symbol sprite data is activated when the composition designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S3301, the pattern sprite data to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S3302, it is determined whether or not the overall α data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in the step S3301.

  In the case of applying the whole α data, in step S3303, the whole α data is read from the specified address and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same specified address. Thereby, the α value set for each pixel of the overall α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data. By the way, when synthesizing the whole α data, the whole α data is synthesized so as to overlap the whole pattern sprite data. The same applies to the case of partial α data.

  On the other hand, in the case of applying the partial α data, in step S3304, the partial α data is read from the designated address and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. Thus, the α value set for each pixel of the partial α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the pattern sprite data.

  After executing step S3303 or step S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) referred to when the composite sprite data created in step S3303 or step S3304 is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Then, this setting process is completed.

  The various parameters grasped in step S3305 are the information set for the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3301. That is, the information of various parameters required for writing in the frame areas 82a and 82b is set for the symbol sprite data, but is not set for the whole α data or the partial α data, and the symbol sprite is set. Information on various parameters set for the data is applied to the synthetic sprite data. As a result, the amount of information specified in the drawing list can be suppressed and the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced compared to the configuration in which various parameter information is set for the entire α data and the partial α data. To be

  By the way, in the case of writing the pattern sprite data for which the setting process is completed in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the background data and the effect data already written in the frame areas 82a and 82b have already been described. An operation for blending (blending operation) is performed.

  Next, how a partial display of symbols is performed using the partial display area PL5 will be described with reference to FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a partial display of a symbol is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the partial display area PL5 is displayed as a range smaller than the display screen G at a position closer to the corner portion of the display screen G. Further, the outer edge of the partial display region PL5 is not in contact with the outer edge of the display screen G, and a gap is formed between all the outer edges of the partial display region PL5 and the outer edge of the display screen G.

  In the partial display area PL5, the variable display of the symbols CH3 and CH4 is performed in a predetermined direction. The predetermined direction is the same as the case where the variable display of the symbols is performed on each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 without displaying the partial display area PL5, but it may be a different direction.

  The symbols CH3 and CH4 that are variably displayed in the partial display area PL5 are displayed so as to appear from one predetermined side of the partial display area PL5 and disappear from the one side opposite to the predetermined side. In this case, these symbols CH3 and CH4 are partially displayed so as not to overflow the partial display area PL5.

  By combining the partial α data for the design as described above, it is possible to display a part of the design using the α data that can be anti-aliased.

  Further, as described above, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 cannot recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, but only the coordinates of the reference pixel. Then, in the process on the program, the process of dividing only part of the symbol sprite data cannot be performed. On the other hand, a configuration is possible in which a plurality of symbol sprite data necessary for performing partial display are set in advance for one symbol. However, the pattern sprite data is data including color information, and has a larger data capacity than the α data in which only the α value is set for each pixel. Therefore, by performing a partial display using the α data, it is possible to perform a partial display while suppressing the data capacity of the image data and the data capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

  Further, when performing partial display, the VDP 76 only needs to read the partial α data and apply it to the image data to be applied. Therefore, partial display can be performed while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the VDP 76.

  Note that anti-aliasing may not be performed when partial α data is applied. Further, the application target of the partial α data is not limited to the design, and may be a background character or a production character. Further, the parameter information may be set independently for the whole α data and the partial α data.

<First Alternative Mode for Partial Display>
A first alternative mode for performing partial display will be described.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first alternative mode, FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (c) show symbol sprite data, and FIGS. 64 (b) and 64 (d) show general α data. 64 (e) to 64 (h) show partial α data.

  In this another mode, as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) to (h), the whole α data PD28 and PD29 are individually set for the respective symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial α data PD30 is set. .. to PD33 are set in common to the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. Incidentally, the initial size of the data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 is the same for all the data PD26 to PD33. The above-mentioned data structure is the same for the symbol sprite data other than the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27 illustrated in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (c).

  In the case of this configuration, when a partial display is not performed, antialiasing can be performed by synthesizing the corresponding overall α data PD28 and PD29 with the respective symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. In the case of displaying a part, first, the corresponding overall α data PD28 and PD29 are combined, and then the partial α data PD30 to PD33 corresponding to the part to be partially displayed are combined to prevent antialiasing. While performing, partial display can be performed using the common partial α data PD30 to PD33.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the types of the partial α data PD30 to PD33 as compared with the configuration in which the partial α data is individually set for the symbol sprite data PD26, PD27, and the partial α data is used. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the data PD30 to PD33.

<Second Alternative Mode for Partial Display>
A second alternative mode for performing partial display will be described.

  FIG. 65 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second alternative mode, and FIG. 65 (b) is a flowchart showing the pattern sprite data setting process in the second alternative mode.

  In this alternative mode, anti-aliasing is performed and part of the symbol is displayed by using α palette data instead of using α data. The α palette data PD34 is data in which α value information is added to each color information of palette data for 256 colors, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-1).

  In the pattern sprite data PD35, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), an image area PA16 and a frame area PA17 are set, but color information not set in the image area PA16 is set in the frame area PA17. Has been done. On the other hand, in the entire α palette data, complete transparency information is set as an α value for the color information set in the frame area PA17. Further, "1" which is non-transmissive information is set as the α value in the color information of the image area PA16 excluding its outer edge portion, and the color information of the outer edge portion is partially transmissive information as the α value. 0 <α value <1 is set. By combining the overall α palette data with the pattern sprite data PD35, antialiasing can be performed as shown in FIG. 65 (a-3).

  Further, in the pattern sprite data PD35, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), a plurality of partial areas PA18 to PA21 in which the same color information is not used are set. On the other hand, complete transparency information is set as an α value for the color information set in some of the partial areas PA18 to PA21 and the frame area PA17, and the color information set in other areas is set. The partial α pallet data in which the opacity information is set as the α value is prepared for Plural types of the partial α pallet data are prepared so that the partial areas PA18 to PA21 to which the α value of the complete transparency information is applied are different from each other. By combining the partial α pallet data with the symbol sprite data PD35, a part of the symbol can be displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (a-4).

  The process of setting the symbol sprite data in the VDP 76 that is executed when the α palette data is used will be described below with reference to FIG. 65 (b).

  First, in step S3401, the pattern sprite data of the current drawing target shown in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S3402, it is determined whether or not the overall α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3401.

  When the α palette data for the whole is applied, the α palette data for the whole is read from the designated address in step S3403, and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the α value added and set to each color information in the overall α palette data is applied to the pattern sprite data.

  On the other hand, in the case of applying the partial α palette data, in step S3404, the partial α palette data is read from the designated address and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the α value added and set to each color information in the partial α palette data is applied to the pattern sprite data.

  After executing step S3403 or step S3404, the process advances to step S3405. In step S3405, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) referred to when writing the composite sprite data created in step S3403 or step S3404 into the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Then, this setting process is completed.

  By executing the above-mentioned processing, the whole alpha palette data or the partial alpha palette data is combined with the symbol sprite data. Even with this configuration, although the data structure of the pattern sprite data is restricted as compared with the case where α data is used, antialiasing and partial display of the pattern sprite can be performed. Further, the setting for partial display can be made in accordance with the setting of color information.

<Another mode for performing character transition display using α data>
Another mode for performing character transition display using α data will be described.

  FIG. 66 (a) is a flowchart showing the character transition process executed by the VDP 76, and FIGS. 66 (b) to 66 (f) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the character transition display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the character transition process, first, in step S3501, the superimposition process of the character sprite data PD36 is executed. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the character sprite data PD36 has a plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 arranged side by side in a predetermined direction, specifically, a horizontal direction, and has a rectangular outer shape. The data is defined so that the periphery of the plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 is surrounded by the frame area PA27. In step S3501, two identical character sprite data PD36 are read, and the data are set so that the entire character sprite data PD36 overlaps front and back.

  In the following step S3502, palette data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the far side. As a result, the same color information is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. In the following step S3503, the alpha data for the whole is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the far side. As a result, anti-aliasing is performed on each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite on the back side.

  In a succeeding step S3504, palette data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the front side. The palette data is different from the palette data set in step S3502 in the color information set for each numerical value information of the bitmap data. As a result, color information different from that of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

  In a succeeding step S3505, it is determined whether or not the entire character α sprite data PD36 is combined with the overall α data. When synthesizing the whole α data, in step S3506, the whole α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side, and then this character transition process is ended. The overall α data is the same as the overall α data used in step S3503. As a result, anti-aliasing is performed on each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

  When the process of step S3506 is executed, finally, on the display screen G, the character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the character sprite data PD36 on the back side are not displayed and the character sprite data on the front side is not displayed. The character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the PD 36 are displayed. In this case, the character is displayed with the color information set in each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3505 that the entire α data is not to be combined, in step S3507 the partial α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side, and then this character transition processing is performed. finish. As shown in FIGS. 66 (c) and 66 (d), the partial α data PD37 and PD38 includes the complete transparency information as an α value for each pixel in the areas corresponding to some of the character areas PA22 to PA26 and the frame area PA27. Is set. Further, non-transparency information is set as an α value for each pixel included in the other character areas PA22 to PA26 excluding its outer edge portion, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion is partially transparent as an α value. Information 0 <α value <1 is set. Further, the partial α data PD37 and PD38 are set in plural types so that the character areas PA22 to PA26 are erased character by character in a predetermined direction, specifically, in order from the left one character at a time.

  When the process of step S3507 is executed, the character area of the character sprite on the back side is finally displayed on the display screen G for the character area that is hidden in the character sprite on the front side. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66 (e) and (f), some of the characters continuous from the left side are displayed in the color information set in each character area in the character sprite on the back side, and , The remaining characters are displayed in the color information set in each character information in the character sprite on the front side. Alternatively, all the characters are displayed in the color information set in each character information in the character sprite on the back side.

  As described above, karaoke-like character transition display can be performed using α data. By the way, the character transition display is executed when a karaoke style effect is performed, and an effect that the corresponding lyrics portion is discolored according to the melody output from the speaker unit 45 is performed.

  The character sprite data PD36 may not be set in an overlapping manner, but a single character sprite data PD36 may be set and the display range may be narrowed sequentially. In this case, the character areas are not sequentially displayed with different colors, but are displayed so as to be sequentially erased.

  Further, the character sprite data on the front side may not be anti-aliased so that the contour portion of each character area is not affected by the image on the back side.

<Structure for performing wipe switching effect>
Next, a configuration for performing the wipe switching effect will be described.

  With the wipe switching effect, the image of the previous display timing is gradually erased at the timing when the background image and a large number of characters are changed, and instead the image of the subsequent display timing is gradually erased by using the erased area. It is an effect to be displayed in.

  The link display function is used for the wipe switching effect. The link display function is a function that integrates the subordinate side image data (relative sprite) with one type of reference side image data (absolute sprite) and enables the VDP 76 side to handle it as one image data. is there. When a plurality of image data are integrated by the link display function, the subordinate side image data is visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data. When the image data is integrated by the link display function, the processing performed on the reference side image data is also applied to the subordinate side image data.

  Further, in the wipe switching effect, the α data for the wipe switching effect is used in order to gradually reveal the image of the subsequent display timing while gradually deleting the image of the previous display timing. The α data for the wipe switching effect is combined with the reference side image data at the previous display timing, but as described above, the subordinate side image data is one image data integrated with the reference side image data. Since it is handled, the α data is also applied to the subordinate image data.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 67, each image data forming the image at the previous display timing, each image data forming the image at the subsequent display timing, and the α data for the wipe switching effect will be described.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows each piece of image data PD39 to PD42 forming the image at the previous display timing. Of these, the image data PD39 is image data for displaying the rearmost image at the previous display timing, and is used as reference side image data in the link display function (hereinafter, the image data PD39 is referred to as reference side image data). PD39). The plurality of image data PD40 to PD42 are image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the backmost image, and are used as subordinate image data in the link display function (hereinafter, referred to as “subordinate image data”). The image data PD40 to PD42 are referred to as subordinate image data PD40 to PD42).

  By applying the link display function to these image data PD39 to PD42, as described above, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data PD39. Becomes Even if the entire subordinate side image data is included in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b, the portion protruding from the reference side image data PD39 is not the drawing target.

  FIG. 67B shows the image data PD43 to PD45 that form the image at the subsequent display timing. The image data PD43 is image data for displaying the rearmost image at the rear display timing, and the plurality of image data PD44 and PD45 is image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the rearmost image. Is. The link display function is not applied to each of the image data PD43 to PD45 forming the image of the post-display timing.

  67 (c) and 67 (d) show α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect. Since the α data PD46 and PD47 are combined with the reference side image data PD39, they have the same size and outer shape as the reference side image data PD39 at the time of initial setting. Further, in each of the α data PD46 and PD47, the completely transparent areas PA28 and PA30 in which the α value of each pixel is set to “0” that is the completely transparent information and the α value of each pixel is “1” that is the opaque information. And opaque areas PA29 and PA31 set to. In each of the α data PD46 and PD47, the area inside the boundary line is the non-transmissive areas PA29 and PA31, and the area outside is the completely transmissive areas PA28 and PA30. The α data PD46 and PD47 are switched and used each time an image for one frame is updated when the wipe switching effect is executed, but the α data PD46 used at the earlier timing is later used. The size of the completely transparent areas PA28 and PA30 is set to be larger than that of the α data PD47 used at the timing.

  A specific processing configuration for executing the wipe switching effect using each of the above image data will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the wipe switching effect executed by the display CPU 72. The wipe switching effect calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S2015 in the task process (FIG. 44). Further, the calculation process for the wipe switching effect is started when the information about the wipe switching effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3601, the respective image data PD43 to PD45 corresponding to the image at the subsequent display timing are grasped based on the currently set data table, and these image data PD43 to PD45 are grasped as the priority side in drawing. To do. In a succeeding step S3602, the parameters of the image data PD43 to PD45 grasped as the post-display timing are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the image data PD43 to PD45. The control information is updated by writing to.

  After that, in steps S3603 to S3609, processing for giving an instruction to draw an image at the previous display timing is executed. First, in step S3603, based on the currently set data table, the reference side image data PD39 of the image at the previous display timing is grasped. In a succeeding step S3604, the control information is calculated by calculating and deriving the parameter of the reference side image data PD39, and writing the information of the derived parameter in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the reference image data PD39. To update.

  In subsequent step S3605, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 of the images at the previous display timing are grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S3606, the parameters of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42. To update the control information.

  Then, in step S3607, the link designation information is stored. The link designation information is information for designating the drawing of image data using the link display function. In the following step S3608, the α data PD46, PD47 for wipe switching effect corresponding to the current drawing instruction is grasped based on the currently set data table. The α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are set in association with the reference side image data PD39, and the application target is the reference side image data PD39.

  After that, after the wipe designation information is stored in step S3609, this operation processing is ended. The wipe designation information is information for instructing to combine the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect with the reference side image data PD39.

  When the calculation processing for wipe switching effect is executed as described above, a drawing list for drawing an image corresponding to the wipe switching effect is created in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408). The drawing list will be described below. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drawing list created when the wipe switching effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 69, a plurality of image data is set in association with each drawing order. In this case, since each image data forming the image of the post-display timing is grasped as the priority side in step S3601 of the arithmetic processing, each image data forming the image of the post-display timing is more preferable in the drawing list. , The drawing order is set earlier than the respective image data forming the image at the previous display timing.

  A link is designated for each image data forming the image at the previous display timing. When the link designation is made, the image data relating to the link designation is processed within the range of one processing of the drawing processing (FIG. 42) in the VDP 76, but the present invention is not limited to this and each processing is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which processing is performed separately in each time. Although not described with reference to the drawings, the parameter P (4) of the background data corresponding to the reference side image data among the image data forming the image at the previous display timing includes the α data for the wipe switching effect. Information is set.

  By the way, the pattern sprite data is set in the drawing order after the image data forming the image at the previous display timing. Therefore, an image in which the variable display of the symbol is being executed is displayed in front of the background image for which the wipe switching effect is being performed.

  Next, the setting process for the wipe switching effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1904 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). In addition, at the timing when the setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed, each image data forming the image at the post-display timing specified in the current drawing list is drawn in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. It has already been done.

  In step S3701, it is determined whether a link designation is set in the drawing list. When the link designation is not set, this setting process is ended as it is. When the link designation is set, the reference side image data PD39 designated as the current drawing target and the reference side image data PD39 in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are transferred in step S3702. Know the address. In the following step S3703, the parameter of the reference side image data PD39 is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S3704, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are transferred are grasped in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In the following step S3705, each parameter of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S3706, link setting is performed. As a result, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 grasped in step S3704 are linked to the reference side image data PD39 grasped in step S3702. Incidentally, at the time of this link, each of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 to which the parameter grasped in step S3705 is applied is linked to the reference side image data PD39 to which the parameter grasped in step S3703 is applied. .

  In a succeeding step S3707, it is determined whether or not the wipe designation is set. If the wipe designation is not set, this setting process is ended as it is. When the wipe designation is set, in step S3708, the α data PD46, PD47 for the wipe switching effect designated this time and the α data PD46, PD47 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM75. Know which address you have. Then, the α data read based on the grasped address is combined with the reference side image data PD39 to which the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are linked. Then, this setting process is completed.

  Next, the state of the wipe switching effect using the link display function will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing before the wipe switching effect is started, the image PC12 at the previous display timing is displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, before the image PC12 at the previous display timing, the variable display of symbols is performed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After that, when the wipe switching effect is started, the reference side image data is drawn after the image data PD43 to PD45 forming the image PC13 at the subsequent display timing are drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. Image data in a state in which the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are linked to the PD39 and the α data PD46 for wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 67C is combined is drawn.

  In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 of the previous display timing are drawn so as to overlap the image data PD43 to PD45 of the subsequent display timing, but the drawing operation is performed for the fusion as described above. To be done. Therefore, in each dot corresponding to the pixel in which the complete transmissive area PA28 is combined, the numerical information of the image data at the subsequent display timing remains as it is. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the pixel to which the non-transparent area PA29 is combined at the previous display timing is overwritten on the dot to be drawn, the numerical information of the image data at the subsequent display timing is erased and the previous display is performed. The image data of the timing is written. As a result, as shown in FIG. 71B, a wipe image in which the outside of the boundary line is the image PC13 at the later display timing and the inside of the boundary line is the image PC12 at the earlier display timing is displayed. In front of the wipe image, variable display of symbols is performed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After that, the drawing process is executed by using the α data PD47 for wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 67 (d) instead of the α data PD46 for wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 67 (c). As shown in 71 (c), the area in which the image PC12 at the earlier display timing is displayed becomes narrower, but the area in which the image PC13 at the later display timing is displayed becomes wider.

  As described above, the background image switching mode is gradually changed over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, so that the background image switching mode can be made novel and the background image switching mode can be changed. It is possible to diversify.

  Further, since the image data PD39 to PD42 forming the image of the front side display timing are linked and the linked image data is combined with the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect, The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for the wipe switching effect is individually combined for the image data PD39 to PD42.

  Further, after simply drawing the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear side display timing in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the image data PD39 to PD42 of the front side display timing are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b. It is a composition. That is, for the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear side display timing, the image data may be drawn normally according to the drawing list. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

  Note that the α data may be individually applied to the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 for the purpose of antialiasing or partial display. Further, the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear side display timing may be configured to be linked.

  The direction of wipe switching is not limited to the configuration in which the image at the previous display timing narrows from the outer side to the inner side over a plurality of frames, and may be configured to narrow from the inner side to the outer side. The configuration may be narrowed from one predetermined side to one side opposite thereto.

<Structure for smoothly moving and displaying sprites>
Next, a configuration for smoothly moving and displaying the sprite will be described.

  When displaying an animation in which the sprite is moving in a predetermined moving direction, the sprite is drawn at a position shifted by a predetermined dot in the moving direction for each frame or for every plurality of frames. A sprite for smooth movement is set as the sprite.

  A sprite for smooth movement will be described with reference to FIG. 72A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, and FIGS. 72B and 72C show sprite data PD48, PD49 for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. It is an explanatory view for explaining.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image representing a cloud displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction with the passage of time. Further, the display size is smaller than that of other individual image PCs 14 which are simultaneously displayed as an image for one frame. The smooth movement sprite CH5 is not limited to the individual image showing the cloud, and if it is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction, it may be an individual image showing another object such as an airplane. It may be.

  A plurality of sprite data is set as image data for displaying the smooth movement sprite CH5. Specifically, two pieces of sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set. Both of these sprite data PD48 and PD49 are for representing the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, but the second sprite data PD49 is based on the frame regions 82a and 82b in the movement direction with respect to the first sprite data PD48. It corresponds to the state of being moved by half a dot.

  Both of the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are data deviated by half a dot due to the difference in the α value at the boundary portion. Comparing both sprite data PD48 and PD49 with each pixel constituting the same boundary part as an example, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), the α value of the pixel on the front side in the moving direction is different. ing.

  As described above, when the α value is “0”, it corresponds to complete transparency information, and in the pixel having the α value of “0”, all the overlapping images on the back side of the display screen G are transmitted. On the other hand, when the α value is “1”, it corresponds to the opaque information, and the pixels having the α value of “1” are in a state of filling the overlapping images on the back side of the display screen G. Further, in the case of 0 <α value <1, the overlapping images on the back side of the display screen G are transmitted in a state of being semi-transparent by the α value.

  By the way, when the smooth movement sprite CH5 is superimposed on the image on the back side, the calculation for fusion is executed. The calculation for the fusion is as described above.

  The first sprite data PD48 has the boundary α value set as shown in FIG. 72 (b), while the second sprite data PD49 has the boundary α value set as shown in FIG. 72 (c). The α value of the portion is set to a value corresponding to a state in which the frame areas 82a and 82b are shifted by half a dot in the moving direction. As a result, when the second sprite data PD49 is set at the same position as the coordinates at which the first sprite data PD48 is set, as shown by the chain line in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), The smooth movement sprite CH5 is visually recognized as if the sprite CH5 moved by a half dot with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount with reference to the display screen G.

  Incidentally, the second sprite data PD49 is created by doubling the first sprite data PD48, shifting it by one dot based on the frame regions 82a and 82b, and then halving it. .

  Next, a processing configuration for performing smooth movement display using each of the sprite data PD48 and PD49 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for smooth movement executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for smooth movement is executed by the background arithmetic processing in step S2015 in the task processing (FIG. 44). Further, the arithmetic processing for smooth movement is started when the information on smooth movement is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether it is the start timing of smooth movement display. This determination is made based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, the area for the progress flag set in the work RAM 73 is cleared in step S3802. In the following step S3803, the numerical information of the progress counter set in the work RAM 73 is initialized.

  In a succeeding step S3804, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a drawing target of this time. In a succeeding step S3805, by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter, the coordinate information of the first sprite data PD48 is calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is stored in the work RAM 73 in the first sprite data PD48. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to. Incidentally, the coordinate information is set so as to correspond one-to-one to the numerical information of the progress counter.

  Thereafter, in step S3806, parameters other than coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. . Further, in step S3807, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, this arithmetic processing is ended. When the above process is executed, in the drawing list, the first sprite data PD48 is set as the drawing target, and the initial value coordinates are set as the coordinates thereof. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, it is determined in step S3808 whether the progress flag is set. If the progress target flag is not set, it means that the first sprite data PD48 has been set in the previous frame, and the process advances to step S3809.

  In step S3809, the progress flag is set. In the following step S3810, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as the current drawing target. In a succeeding step S3811, control is performed by grasping the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 and writing the grasped coordinate information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with the second sprite data PD49. Information for In this case, since the progress counter updating process is not executed, the same coordinate information as the coordinate information at which the first sprite data PD48 was drawn in the previous frame is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S3812, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the second sprite data PD49, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. . Further, in step S3807, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, this arithmetic processing is ended. When the above process is executed, the second sprite data PD49 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and the same coordinates as the previous frame are set as the coordinates thereof. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  If it is determined in step S3808 that the progress flag is set, it means that the second sprite data PD49 has been set in the previous frame, and the process advances to step S3813.

  In step S3813, the progress target flag is cleared. In a succeeding step S3814, the progress counter is updated so that 1 is added. In the following step S3815, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the current drawing target. In subsequent step S3816, by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter updated in step S3814, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is secured as above. The information for control is updated by writing in the area. In this case, the information of the coordinates that have advanced by one dot in the movement direction with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b with respect to the coordinates set in the previous frame is grasped.

  After that, in step S3817, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. . Further, in step S3807, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, this arithmetic processing is ended. When the above process is executed, the first sprite data PD48 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and its coordinates are displaced by one dot from the coordinates set in the previous frame in the movement direction. Is set. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  Next, the smoothing movement setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for smooth movement is executed in the content grasping process of step S1904 in the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, the setting process for smooth movement is started when the smooth movement designation is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the current drawing target is the first sprite data PD48. If it is the first sprite data PD48, the flow advances to step S3902 to grasp the first sprite data PD48 as a drawing target, and at the same time, the first sprite data PD48 is transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM75. Know the address. On the other hand, if it is not the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S3903, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as a drawing target, and the second sprite data PD49 in the change area 81b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. Figure out which address is being forwarded to.

  After executing the processing of step S3902 or step S3903, the coordinates of the drawing target at this time are grasped in step S3904, and other parameters are grasped in step S3905, and then this setting processing is ended.

  By executing the setting process for smooth movement, in the subsequent write process (step S1905), the sprite data PD48, PD49 of the current drawing target is written in the drawing target frame regions 82a, 82b. The data is drawn at the specified coordinates. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinate in the moving direction is “n” in the first frame, and the coordinate in the moving direction is in the second frame. The second sprite data PD49 is set so as to be the same for "n". In addition, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinate in the moving direction becomes “n + 1” in the third frame, and the second sprite data PD48 is set in the fourth frame so that the coordinate in the moving direction becomes “n + 1”. Sprite data PD49 is set. Then, after the first sprite data PD48 and the second sprite data PD49 are alternately set for the same coordinates, the state in which the moving direction is updated by one dot is repeated. As a result, the smooth movement sprite CH5 is visually recognized for each frame as if the sprite CH5 is progressing by half a dot with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b or with a corresponding amount based on the display screen G. It can be smoothly moved and displayed.

  In particular, the smooth movement sprite CH5 has a smaller display size than other individual images PC14 that are displayed at the same time, and therefore, for each frame, one dot or the display screen G is set based on the frame regions 82a and 82b. In the configuration in which the amount of movement corresponding to one dot is used as a reference, the amount of movement with respect to its own area becomes a large proportion, and there is a concern that the movement may be noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, the sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed without causing such an inconvenience.

  Further, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image showing a cloud, but when the frame rate is lowered as if this cloud is moving slowly, the frame areas 82a and 82b are used as a reference at the timing of movement. However, in a configuration in which one dot is moved or the display screen G is moved by an amount corresponding to the one dot, there is a concern that it may be noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, even if one dot or a corresponding amount is moved in each of a plurality of frames, the movement is performed by less than one dot with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b during that time. , The sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

  Incidentally, as the configuration for reducing the frame rate, specifically, the information of the same coordinates is applied to the first sprite data PD48 by the number of the first plurality of frames, and the information of the same coordinates is changed to the second information. A configuration in which the coordinate information is advanced by one dot when the second plurality of frames is applied to the sprite data PD49 can be considered. In this case, the first plurality of frames and the second plurality of frames may be the same number or may be different numbers. However, if it is desired to display the smooth movement sprite CH5 as if it is proceeding at a constant speed, it is preferable that the first plurality of frames and the second plurality of frames have the same number.

  Further, the smooth movement display as described above can be realized only by alternately drawing the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot. That is, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration. Further, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 can be created by a simple method of making the α value of the outer edge portion different.

  Since the difference between the sprite data PD48 and PD49 is half a dot, the apparent movement amount should be the same when switching from one to the other and when switching from the other to the one. You can

  The sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot are not limited to the configuration, and sprite data shifted by less than 1 dot such as 1/4 dot or 1/4 dot may be provided. . In addition to the reference sprite data, a plurality of sprite data for less than one dot such as 1/4 dot, half dot, and 3/4 dot may be provided so that the movement amounts are different. .

  Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b and the number of dots in the display screen G have a one-to-one correspondence, the second sprite data PD49 is based on the display screen G with respect to the first sprite data PD48. As a result, the data is shifted by half a dot.

  Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is smaller than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is displaced from the first sprite data PD48 by a half dot with respect to the display screen G as a reference. The configuration may be set as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48, PD49 will be set as data deviated by less than half a dot with reference to the frame areas 82a, 82b. Also, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data that is shifted by less than one dot with respect to the display screen G and not by a half dot.

  Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is larger than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is displaced from the first sprite data PD48 by a half dot with respect to the display screen G as a reference. The configuration may be set as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data that is displaced by more than half a dot with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Also, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data that is shifted by less than one dot with respect to the display screen G and not by a half dot.

  Further, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are not pre-stored in the memory module 74, but only one is pre-stored, and the other is written from one sprite data after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The configuration may be created and stored separately. In this case, since it is necessary to create the one sprite data and store the sprite data separately, the processing load increases, but the storage capacity required to store the sprite data in the memory module 74 can be reduced.

  Further, the above-described configuration for smooth movement may be applied to a sprite in which a part is displayed so as to move, instead of a sprite in which the whole is displayed to move.

<Structure for zooming in using the scaler 97>
Next, a configuration for performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

  As described above, the VDP 76 outputs an image signal toward the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the output target frame regions 82a and 82b, and displays the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. A display circuit 94 for displaying an image corresponding to the drawing data is provided (see FIG. 39). Incidentally, the image signal is a signal including gradation data for determining a display color in each dot (each pixel) of the liquid crystal display section 31a, and is output to the symbol display device 31 based on a predetermined clock signal. .

  The display circuit 94 converts the number of pixels of the drawing data read from the output target frame regions 82a and 82b into the number of pixels designated by the display CPU 72, and also each dot forming the liquid crystal display unit 31a of the symbol display device 31. A scaler 97 that generates gradation data of (each pixel) is provided.

  The scaler 97 is provided as a dedicated circuit for resolution adjustment in the display circuit 94. As shown in FIG. 39, the scaler 97 is provided with a resolution adjusting buffer 97a. When the scaler 97 generates gradation data, the drawing data created in the output target frame areas 82a and 82b is transferred to the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the gradation data for the specified number of pixels is acquired. The drawing data is converted so that In this conversion, linear interpolation processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pixels can be converted using bilinear filtering.

  On the basis of the gradation data created in the resolution adjusting buffer 97a, an image signal is generated by the image signal output section 98 provided in the display circuit 94 and is output to the symbol display device 31, and the symbol display device 31 is displayed. One frame of image is displayed. Incidentally, the image signal output unit 98 is provided with a line buffer 98a, and fine control is performed using the line buffer 98a when generating or outputting an image signal.

  Here, when drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written in all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800. The number of dots is × 600. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display unit 31a has a resolution of 1024 × 768 dots. That is, the liquid crystal display unit 31a has a higher resolution than the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  When the resolution adjustment value (adjustment information) in the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value (initial adjustment information), the drawing data created at a resolution of 800 × 600 corresponds to the liquid crystal display unit 31a at 1024. It is converted into gradation data having a resolution of × 768. The state of this conversion will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 75A, the range defined by the solid line is the range of the resolution adjusting buffer 97a, and the range defined by the alternate long and short dash line is the range in which the transferred drawing data PD50 is written. When the resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD50 with the resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, the drawing data PD50 is converted into the gradation data PD51 of the size shown in the range defined by the alternate long and two short dashes line. In this case, the number of pixels of the gradation data PD51 is equal to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and all the data forming the gradation data PD51 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. That is, when converting to the resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, since the gradation data for all the dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is created by using all the pixels of the drawing data, The number of pixels of gradation data increases.

  The initial adjustment value is set based on the initial setting process (FIG. 10) being executed by the display CPU 72, as described above. The area in the resolution adjusting buffer 97a to which the drawing data PD50 is transferred is always constant.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the scaler 97 is used to perform the zoom-in effect on the image. In this zoom-in effect, the resolution adjustment value in the scaler 97 is set to the enlargement adjustment value. A plurality of enlargement adjustment values are set so that the corresponding resolutions are different, and each resolution is higher than the resolution of the initial adjustment value. The manner in which the drawing data is converted into the gradation data having the resolution corresponding to the predetermined enlargement adjustment value will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD52 indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 75 (b) at the resolution corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value, the gradation data of the size indicated by the range divided by the alternate long and two short dashes line Converted to PD53. In this case, since the number of pixels of the gradation data PD53 is larger than the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, it is impossible to output all the data forming the gradation data PD53 to the symbol display device 31 as image signals.

  On the other hand, the display CPU 72 specifies the range of the gradation data PD53 to be output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. At the time of this designation, the address of the dot serving as the drawing reference point is designated in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, but the designation method is arbitrary as long as the designation can be performed well.

  In the display circuit 94, when the drawing reference point is designated, the data in the range shown by the broken line in FIG. 75 (b) in the gradation data PD53 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. In this case, since the image signal is output by using some pixels of the drawing data, the image display on the symbol display device 31 in a state where a part of the image corresponding to the drawing data is substantially enlarged. Is done.

  The drawing reference point corresponds to any of the dots at the four corners in the range where the image signal is output, but which dot is targeted is arbitrary. Further, the information capacity of the resolution adjusting buffer 97a is set to an information capacity capable of storing all pixels of the gradation data regardless of which enlargement adjustment value is used to convert the drawing data to the gradation data. Has been done.

  A specific processing configuration for executing the zoom-in effect of an image using the scaler 97 will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for zoom-in effect executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation processing for zoom-in effect is shared and executed by the calculation processing of steps S2015 to S2017 in the task processing (FIG. 44), but for convenience of description, it is shown here as a single flowchart.

  First, in step S4001, the image data for background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4002, the parameter of the grasped background image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the background image data. Update the control information.

  In subsequent step S4003, the effect image data is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4004, the parameter of the grasped effect image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the effect image data. Update the control information.

  In a succeeding step S4005, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the timing to expand the scaler 97 as compared with the initial adjustment value. If it is not the timing to enlarge, in step S4006, the image data for the symbol (that is, the symbol sprite data) is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4007, the parameter of the grasped image data for the symbol is calculated and derived in accordance with that the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value, and the information of the derived parameter is stored in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the design. Then, this calculation process is completed.

  When the arithmetic processing for zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), drawing for drawing an image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to the initial adjustment value. A list is created and sent to VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is the timing to enlarge the scaler 97 relative to the initial adjustment value, in step S4008, information about the current enlargement adjustment value is obtained. Information on each enlargement adjustment value is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 and transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. Information on any of the enlargement adjustment values is set in the data table, and in step S4008, the information on the enlargement adjustment values shown in the currently set data table is grasped.

  In the following step S4009, information on the drawing reference point of this time is grasped. The information of the drawing reference point is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of the adjustment value for enlargement. The information on each drawing reference point is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance and transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. Information on any of the drawing reference points is set in the data table, and in step S4009, the information on the drawing reference points shown in the currently set data table is grasped. In subsequent step S4010, zoom-in designation information is stored.

  Then, in step S4011, the image data for the design is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4012, the parameter of the grasped image data for the design is calculated and derived in accordance with that the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for enlargement of this time, and the information of the derived parameter is stored in the work RAM 73. In, the information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the symbol. In this case, the coordinates and the size of the image data for the symbol are calculated so that the symbol display position and the symbol size on the display screen G are not changed between the pre-execution timing and the execution timing of the zoom-in effect.

  Specifically, when the image data of the same size is resolution-adjusted by the scaler 97, the size is larger in the resolution adjustment using the enlargement adjustment value than in the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the size information of the image data for the design specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the size after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value will be the same as the size after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Is specified to be smaller than.

  Further, when the resolution of the image data is adjusted by the scaler 97, the position of the image is displaced in the enlargement direction by the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value as compared with the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the coordinate information of the image data for the design specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the position after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the position after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. It is specified by displacing it in the direction opposite to the enlargement direction.

  After executing the processing of step S4012, the present arithmetic processing is terminated. When the arithmetic processing for zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to any of the enlargement adjustment values is drawn. A drawing list for doing so is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, the drawing list includes information on the adjustment value for enlargement, information on the drawing reference point, and zoom-in designation information indicating that the zoom-in effect should be performed. Further, with respect to the image data for symbols, parameter information corresponding to the simultaneously designated enlargement adjustment value is set.

  By the way, the number of pieces of image data for which adjustment for enlargement is performed on the parameter information as described above is equal to or less than the number of pieces of image data for which adjustment for enlargement is not performed.

  Next, the zoom-in effect setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The setting process for zoom-in effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1904 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, when the zoom-in designation information is set in the drawing list, the zoom-in effect setting process is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the zoom-in designation information is set in association with the image data for symbols, the setting process for zoom-in effect is the drawing order of the image data for symbols in the drawing list this time. If it is started.

  In the drawing order in the drawing list, the image data for background and the image data for effect are set as an order prior to the image data for symbol, so the setting process for zoom-in effect is executed. At the timing, the drawing of the background image data and the effect image data is completed.

  First, in step S4101, the information of the enlargement adjustment value designated in the drawing list is set by writing it in the dedicated area of the register 92 (see FIG. 39). Here, the dedicated area is set as an area different from the area in which the information of the initial adjustment value is written. Therefore, even if the information of the adjustment value for enlargement is set, the information of the initial adjustment value is not erased.

  In the subsequent step S4102, the information of the drawing reference point designated in the drawing list is set by writing it in the dedicated area of the register 92. Here, when the resolution adjustment is performed with the initial adjustment value, the drawing reference point corresponding to the initial adjustment value is predetermined in the display circuit 94 because it is sufficient to always set the drawing reference point to a constant value.

  In a succeeding step S4103, an enlargement flag is set in a predetermined area set in the register 92. When the display circuit 94 outputs an image signal by setting the enlargement flag, the resolution adjustment is performed with the enlargement adjustment value set in step S4101, and the resolution is set in step S4102. An image signal output target range is defined with reference to the drawing reference point. The enlargement flag is deleted based on an instruction from the display CPU 72 when the zoom-in effect is finished.

  In a succeeding step S4104, the image data for the symbol designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the image data for the symbol is transferred in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Further, in step S4105, the parameters of the image data for symbols are grasped. Then, this setting process is completed.

  By executing the setting process for the zoom-in effect as described above, the drawing data created based on the drawing list specified this time is subjected to resolution adjustment with the corresponding enlargement adjustment value and converted into gradation data. The converted data is output as an image signal in a predetermined range based on the drawing reference point.

  The output process executed by the display circuit 94 to output the image signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The output process is started when the display CPU 72 gives an instruction to output the image signal, and is substantially started at the image update start timing (for example, 20 msec).

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether the enlargement flag is set in the register 92. If the enlargement flag is not set, in step S4202, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the initial adjustment value is executed. In this case, the information of the initial adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation processing is executed according to the initial adjustment value. In the linear interpolation process, in order to interpolate the increase in the number of pixels due to the increase in resolution, the numerical information (or pixel value) of each pixel after expansion is linearly calculated from the numerical information set for the four points of pixels before expansion. Bilinear interpolation is obtained by interpolation. Note that the bilinear interpolation is not executed collectively for all pixels, but is executed sequentially for each predetermined number of pixels.

  In the following step S4203, it is determined whether or not the conversion into the gradation data is completed, and if not completed, the process returns to step S4202. If it is completed, in step S4204, the dot to be output is grasped based on a predetermined initial reference point.

  After that, in step S4205, after the image signal output processing is executed, the main output processing is ended. In the image signal output processing, the image signals for the dots recognized in step S4204 are sequentially output.

  On the other hand, if the enlargement flag is set (step S4201: YES), in step S4206, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the currently-specified enlargement adjustment value is executed. In this case, information on the adjustment value for enlargement is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and linear interpolation processing is executed according to the adjustment value for enlargement. The details of the linear interpolation processing are as described above.

  In a succeeding step S4207, it is determined whether or not the conversion into the gradation data is completed, and if the conversion is not completed, the process returns to the step S4206. If it has been completed, in step S4208, the drawing reference point designated this time is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the dot to be output is grasped based on the grasped drawing reference point.

  After that, in step S4205, after the image signal output processing is executed, the main output processing is ended. In the image signal output processing, the image signals for the dots recognized in step S4208 are sequentially output.

  Next, the zoom-in effect will be described. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the manner of zoom-in effect. Further, FIG. 79A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image at the image update timing immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, and FIG. 79B is an image update timing next to the image update timing and is the zoom-in timing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image of the timing when the production was started.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, the character CH6 is displayed near the center of the background image PC15, and the symbols CH7 and CH8 are displayed in the upper left and upper right. ing. The image is in the reach display with the symbols CH7 and CH8, and the character CH6 is displayed as an effect of the reach display. When the image is displayed, each image data is drawn in the output target frame areas 82a and 82b with the same relative size and relative position as in FIG.

  At the next image update timing in the above state, the zoom-in effect is started. In this case, each image data is drawn in the output target frame areas 82a and 82b with a relative size and a relative position as shown in FIG. 79 (b-1). As shown in FIG. 79 (b-2), resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data with the enlargement adjustment value and the image signal is output based on the area grasped with the drawing reference point as a reference. Image is displayed.

  In this image, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 are enlarged so as to zoom in on the character CH6 as compared with the image in FIG. 79 (a). On the other hand, the positions and sizes of the symbols CH7 and CH8 are the same, substantially the same, or similar to the positions and sizes in the case of FIG. 79 (a).

  By the way, when the same line of the character CH6 is compared, in the state of FIG. 79 (a), the line is displayed with the gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 79 (c-1), whereas in FIG. In the state of b-2), the lines are displayed with the gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 79 (c-2).

  Further, by displaying the image shown in FIG. 79 (b-2) and then the image shown in FIG. 79 (a), the VDP 76 only returns to the resolution adjustment based on the initial adjustment value. Is displayed as if zoomed out. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 can perform not only the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 but also the zoom-out effect using the scaler 97. Further, as already described, since a plurality of combinations of the enlargement adjustment value and the drawing reference point are set, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed in stages.

  As described above, the scaler 97 can be used to perform the zoom-in effect, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. For example, a similar zoom-in effect can be performed by drawing each image data in an enlarged state when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b. In this case, all image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. It becomes necessary to execute processing, which increases the processing load on the VDP 76. Further, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the image data for normal size and the image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for enlarging and displaying the image is performed by the display circuit 94 instead of the control unit 91 of the VDP 76. Therefore, it is possible to perform the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

  Further, the size of the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is the same regardless of whether or not the zoom-in effect is performed. Accordingly, the drawing data can be created in the frame areas 82a and 82b with the same processing configuration whether the zoom-in effect is performed or not.

  Further, in the display circuit 94, when zoom-in effect is not performed, resolution adjustment is performed with a specified initial adjustment value, and a range in which an image signal is output is grasped based on a predetermined initial reference point. In, when the zoom-in effect is performed, only the adjustment value and the reference point that are referred to are changed. Therefore, the zoom-in effect can be performed while using the hardware configuration of the display circuit 94 when the zoom-in effect is not performed.

  Further, even when the zoom-in effect is performed, the symbol is not displayed in an enlarged manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the pattern from being lowered during the zoom-in effect. In particular, the display CPU 72 specifies the parameter of the image data for the design as a parameter that is not to be enlarged and the VDP 76 only has to draw the image data for the design according to the parameter. Therefore, while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the VDP 76, It is possible to improve the visibility of the design.

  Further, when the zoom-in effect is finished, the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is returned to the initial adjustment value. As a result, when the zoom-in effect is finished, the display of the image according to the resolution of the display screen G can be restarted.

  The display circuit 94 may be configured to execute the process corresponding to the output process (FIG. 78) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using the program. Further, the display circuit 94 may not be built in the VDP 76 but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the display circuit 94 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal route may be provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 in addition to the signal route. The display circuit 94 may be provided above.

  Further, the initial adjustment value and the enlargement adjustment value may be written in the same area in the register 92. In this case, it is preferable to execute the process of returning the information of the area to the initial adjustment value after the zoom-in effect. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently in the VDP 76.

  The initial reference point may be set in the register 92 when setting the initial adjustment value in the register 92. In this case, the area in which the initial reference point is set and the area in which the drawing reference point is set may be set separately, and each of these pieces of information may be set in the same area. In the case where the areas are set in the same area, it is advisable to execute the process of returning the information of the area to the initial reference point after the zoom-in effect. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently in the VDP 76.

  Further, the image data for which the adjustment for enlargement is performed on the parameter information is not limited to the image data for the symbol, and may be the image data for a predetermined effect or the image data for the background. . In this case, for example, for the effect character that is not the enlargement target, the adjustment for enlargement may be performed so that at least the entire character is displayed, and the adjustment for enlargement is performed so that at least the position does not change. It may be configured.

  In addition to the scaler 97, a circuit may be provided for adjusting the size of drawing data in order to perform a zoom-in effect or a zoom-out effect.

  Further, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is the initial adjustment value, only a part of the drawing data may be output as an image signal. In this case, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for reduction, the range in which the image data is output in the drawing data is widened so that the zoom from the state displayed with the initial adjustment value is performed. It is possible to perform out production.

<Direction using moving image data>
Next, the effect using moving image data will be described.

  The moving image data is image data which has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with one frame of still image data as a reference and encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

  The moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 80A to 80C, as moving image data, moving image data PD54 for before branching, moving image data PD55 for A after branching, and moving image data PD56 for B after branching. , Are set. The moving image data PD54 to PD56 are set to perform super-reach display that develops after normal reach display or without the normal reach display among the reach displays.

  In each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame.

  The compressed data is one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

  The I picture data is data that can be used to create still image data for one frame by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data preceding by one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. . When decoding the B picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to the I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and the I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames after the decoding. This is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

  In the compressed data of each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame, ..., M-1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m + 1th frame, ..., N−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

  The contents of the images set in the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 (a) shows a part of the content of the image set in the moving image data PD54 before branching, and FIG. 81 (b) is set in the moving image data PD55 for branching A. 81C shows the contents of part of the image, and FIG. 81C shows the contents of the part of the image set in the moving image data PD56 for B after branching.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a-1), the moving image data PD54 for pre-branching is superimposed on the background image PC16 for pre-branching showing a wavy state so that the moving target character which is a boy character. Reference data (I picture data) PD57 corresponding to the image to which CH9 is added is set. Also, as shown in FIGS. 81 (a-2) and 81 (a-3), the difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC16 but in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction. Data, B picture data) PD58 and PD59 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD57, and the difference data PD58, PD59 is applied to the reference data PD57, so that each difference data PD58, One frame of still image data to which the moving target character CH9 set in the PD 59 is added is created.

  In the moving image data PD55 for A after branch, as shown in FIG. 81 (b-1), the same boy character is overlaid on the background image PC17 for A after branch in which many jellyfish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD60 corresponding to the image to which a certain moving target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 81 (b-2) and 81 (b-3), the difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC17 but in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction is shown. Data, B picture data) PD61 and PD62 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD60, and the difference data PD61 and PD62 are applied to the reference data PD60, so that each difference data PD61 is set to the background image PC17 set in the reference data PD60. , One frame of still image data to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 62 is added is created.

  In the post-branching B moving image data PD56, as shown in FIG. 81 (c-1), the same boy character is overlaid on the post-branching B background image PC18 in which many fish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD63 corresponding to the image to which a certain moving target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 81 (c-2) and (c-3), the difference data (P picture) corresponding to the image which does not have the background image PC18 but in which the movement target character CH9 moves in the predetermined direction is shown. Data, B picture data) PD64 and PD65 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD63, and the difference data PD64 and PD65 are applied to the reference data PD63, so that each difference data PD64 is applied to the background image PC18 set in the reference data PD63. , One frame of still image data to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 65 is added is created.

  Using each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the super reach display corresponding to the effect branch is executed. Specifically, when the super reach display is started, the pre-branch effect is executed by each still image data created from the pre-branching moving image data PD54.

  After that, at the branch timing, one of the post-branch A effect and the post-branch B effect is selected. In the case of the selection, the post-branch A production is selected when the effect operation device 48 is operated at the determination timing before the branch timing, and the effect operation device 48 is not operated at the determination timing. After branching, the effect for B is selected. When the post-branch A effect is selected, the post-branch A effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch A moving image data PD55. On the other hand, when the post-branch B effect is selected, the post-branch B effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch B moving image data PD56.

  It should be noted that the specific trigger for selecting either the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is not limited to the above, and the effect operation device 48 operates in the specific operation mode at the determination timing. If it is operated, if the operating device 48 for performance is operated a specific number of times or a specific period at the determination timing, or is determined in advance from the start of the current super reach display to the branch timing. When one or more game balls have entered the ball entering portion, one effect may be selected.

  A specific processing configuration for performing super reach display using the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a moving image calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The moving image calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S2015 in the task process (FIG. 44). The arithmetic processing for the moving image is started when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the super reach display is performed is set.

  First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not it is after the branch timing based on the currently set data table. If it is the timing before branching, in step S4302, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the pre-branching effect is being executed.

  If the pre-branch effect is not being executed, it means that the timing is before the start timing of the above-mentioned super reach display, and therefore the flow proceeds to step S4303. In step S4303, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to decode the moving image data PD54 before branching.

  If it is the timing to decode the moving image data PD54 before branching, in step S4304, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address to which the moving image data PD54 before branching is transferred in advance, and the moving image data PD54 before branching are decoded to generate still image data for a plurality of frames. When created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the change area 81b is grasped.

  After that, in step S4305, the decode designation information for before branching is stored. Incidentally, the timing determined in step S4303 is set so that the decoding of the moving image data PD54 for pre-branch is completed before the pre-branch effect is started.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4303, or after the execution of step S4305, in step S4306, arithmetic processing corresponding to the timing before the pre-branching effect is generated is executed. Specifically, the image data for background is grasped based on the currently set data table, and various parameters of the image data are calculated to update the control information. Then, this calculation process is completed.

  When the moving image arithmetic process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the background image data in the image corresponding to the timing before the pre-branching effect occurs is drawn. A drawing list including the above is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. Further, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing for designating the decoding of the pre-branching moving image data PD54, the decoding designating information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the above-described pre-branching moving image data PD54 are performed. Information on various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  When it is determined in step S4302 that the pre-branching effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4307. In step S4307, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the timing to decode the post-branching moving image data PD55 and PD56.

  If it is the timing to decode the post-branching moving image data PD55, PD56, in step S4308, it is determined whether the decoding target is the post-branching A moving image data PD55. Specifically, in the data table, a key for determining whether or not the effect operation device 48 has been operated at the determination timing before the branch timing is set, and when the key is confirmed, Determines whether or not a flag indicating that the effect operation device 48 has been operated is set in the work RAM 73. Incidentally, the flag is set in the command corresponding process in step S403 when the reception of the operation generation command is confirmed in step S402 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72. In step S4308, an affirmative determination is made when a flag indicating that the operation device for performance 48 has been operated is set, and a negative determination is made when the flag is not set.

  When the decoding target is the moving image data PD55 for A after branching (step S4308: YES), various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S4309. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address to which the moving image data PD55 for A after branching is transferred in advance, and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching are decoded to obtain a still image for a plurality of frames. When the data is created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. Then, in step S4310, the decode designation information for A after branch is stored.

  On the other hand, when the decoding target is the moving image data PD56 for B after branch (step S4308: NO), various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S4311. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address to which the moving image data PD56 for B after branching is transferred in advance and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are decoded and still images for a plurality of frames are decoded. When the data is created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. Thereafter, in step S4312, the decode designation information for A after branch is stored.

  By the way, the timing determined in step S4307 is set so that the decoding of the target post-branching moving image data PD55 and PD56 is completed before any one of the post-branching effects is started.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4307 or after the execution of step S4310 or step S4312, the process proceeds to step S4313. In step S4313, the address where the still image data corresponding to the frame number of this time is stored in the still image data created from the moving image data before branching is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4314, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the parameter of the still image data and writing the information of the derived parameter in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the still image data. To do. After that, in step S4315, the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing is ended.

  When the moving image calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data before branching is included as a drawing target and A drawing list in which the parameters of still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. Further, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing for designating the decoding of the moving image data PD55 for A after branching, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD55 for branching A are set. Information on the above various addresses is set in the drawing list. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing for designating the decoding of the moving image data PD56 for B after branch, the decode designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD56 for B after branch are provided. Information on the above various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  Since the background image and the effect image are mixed in the still image data, it is not necessary to set the effect image separately from the still image data. Therefore, when the still image data is set as the drawing target, the effect calculation process of step S2016 is skipped. However, since the symbol is displayed separately from the still image data, the symbol calculation process is not skipped. This is the same in other cases where still image data is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S4301 that the timing is after the branch timing, the flow proceeds to step S4316. In step S4316, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the effect to be executed is the after-branch A effect. By the way, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, data corresponding to the post-branch A effect is set as data to be referred to after branching in the data table, and when negative determination is made, in the data table. As data to be referred to after the branch, data corresponding to the after-branch B effect is set.

  If the effect to be executed is the after-branch A effect, the process proceeds to step S4317. In step S4317, of the still image data created from the moving image data for A after branching, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4318, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data to update the control information. To do. After that, in step S4319, after the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended.

  When the moving image arithmetic process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data for A after branch is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  When the effect to be executed is the after-branch B effect, the process proceeds to step S4320. In step S4320, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the frame number of this time is stored in the still image data created from the moving image data for B after branch is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4321, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data to update the control information. To do. After that, in step S4322, after the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended.

  When the moving image arithmetic process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data for B after branch is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the decoding process executed by the video decoder 93 of the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is activated when any of the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72. The decoding process is activated asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 42) executed by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 and the output process (FIG. 78) executed by the display circuit 94.

  First, in step S4401, the address of the moving image data specified this time is grasped from the information of the transfer destination address specified in the drawing list. In the following step S4402, the area of the expansion destination of the moving image data is grasped from the information of the expansion destination address specified in the drawing list.

  In subsequent step S4403, the moving image data is read from the address grasped in step S4401, and the moving image data is decoded. Then, each still image data of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S4402. Then, this decoding process is terminated.

  Next, the moving image setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83 (b).

  The moving image setting process is executed as part of the content grasping process executed in step S1904 of the drawing process (FIG. 42). Further, when the moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the moving image is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the moving image designation information is set in association with the still image data to be drawn, the setting process for moving images is based on the drawing order of the still image data in the drawing list this time. It will be started when it becomes.

  In the drawing order in the drawing list, since the still image data is set as an order prior to the image data for the symbol, after the setting process for the moving image is executed and the still image data is drawn. , A pattern is drawn.

  First, in step S4501, the information of the address where the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S4502, the still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the information of the address grasped in step S4501. In the following step S4503, the parameter of the still image data is grasped from the information set in the drawing list. Then, this setting process is completed.

  Since the moving image setting process is executed as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S1905), still image data is applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn with the parameters applied. Is drawn. Further, since the image data for the symbol is also set in the drawing list this time, the image data for the symbol is drawn so that the symbol is displayed in front of the still image corresponding to the still image data. . Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that an image for one frame forming the super reach display is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, since a series of images corresponding to the super reach display is displayed by using the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the images of each frame of the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are individually set as still image data. Compared with the configuration of storing, the storage capacity required for storing image data in the NAND flash memory 102 is suppressed, and the production of the above-mentioned super reach display is performed using a live-action image or a high-definition image. be able to.

  Further, in the super reach display, the pre-branch effect is performed until the branch timing, and after the branch timing, the contents of the destination effect are switched according to the operation mode of the effect operation device 48. As a result, it is possible to prevent the super reach display from becoming uniform, and it is possible to provide various effects.

  In this case, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are the moving image data PD54 for before branch corresponding to the effect before branch, the moving image data PD55 for A after branch corresponding to the effect for A after branch, and the B after branch B. It is set separately from the moving image data PD56 for B after branch corresponding to the production effect. Therefore, until the branch timing, the still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 before the branch is drawn in sequence in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. Pre-production can be performed. After the branch timing, still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target of the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed only by sequentially drawing in the same frame order.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. Further, both the single moving image data in which the pre-branching effect and the after-branching A effect are set and the single moving image data in which the before-branching effect and the after-branching B effect are set are prepared in advance. It is also possible to set it up. However, since it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the first order frame, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when the super reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, it is feared that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. Compared to each of the assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are separately prepared as described above, so that the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used is switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Since it is sufficient, the above-mentioned super-reach display can be suitably executed.

  Further, when the super reach display is started, the moving image data PD54 for before branching is decoded, and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are decoded. Do not decode. As a result, the processing load at the time of starting the super reach display can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which all the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are collectively decoded.

  In addition, the determination as to which of the post-branch A effect and the post-branch B effect is to be performed is performed before the branch timing and before the branch timing, and before the branch timing, after the branch timing. Of the moving image data PD55 for A and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching, only the moving image data corresponding to the effect of the sorting destination is decoded. As a result, it is possible to smoothly start the display of a new moving image after the completion of the pre-branching effect. Further, as compared with the configuration in which both moving image data for branching are decoded, the processing load related to decoding is suppressed, and the storage capacity required for decoding in the VRAM 75 is reduced.

  Even if the configuration in which the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are separately stored as described above is applied to an effect different from the effect in which the destination effect is arbitrarily selected according to the situation up to the branch timing. Good. For example, in a configuration in which the first effect (first reach display) and the second effect (second reach display) that are common from the start timing to the middle and have different aspects from the middle are set, The configuration may include first moving image data for displaying an image from the start to the middle, and second moving image data and third moving image data corresponding to the mode from the middle. In this case, since the first moving image data can be commonly used, the entire data capacity can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the entire moving image data is individually provided for each effect.

  Further, for example, as the display effect, only the normal reach display is performed, the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, and the second super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed. In the configuration in which the case is set, moving image data for normal reach display, moving image data for first super reach display, and moving image data for second super reach display are set. It may be configured. In this case, in the game times in which the normal reach display is performed, still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display may be sequentially displayed. Further, in the game time in which the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the normal reach display moving image data is sequentially displayed, and then the first super reach display moving image is displayed. Still image data created from the data may be sequentially displayed. Further, in the game time of performing the second super reach display after performing the normal reach display, after displaying still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display in sequence, the moving image for the second super reach display is displayed. Still image data created from the data may be sequentially displayed.

  According to this configuration, moving image data for normal reach display may be commonly used in each of the game times for performing the first super-reach display and the game times for performing the second super-reach display. It is possible to suppress the entire data capacity as compared with the configuration in which the content of the normal reach display is included in each of the moving image data of the super reach display and the moving image data of the second super reach display.

  In addition, the form after the pre-branching effect or after the common effect is not limited to two patterns, and may be three patterns, four patterns, or five patterns or more. In this case, the effect of individually having the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above is further enhanced.

  Further, the moving picture decoder 93 may be configured to execute the processing corresponding to the decoding processing (FIG. 83A) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using the program. Further, the video decoder 93 may not be built in the VDP 76 but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the moving picture decoder 93 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal route is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. The moving picture decoder 93 may be provided on the top.

  Further, in a configuration in which the timing for determining the effect after the branch is the same as or close to the timing for the branch, the moving image data PD55 for the after-branch A and the data for the after-branch B for the period during which the before-branch effect is executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which both of the moving image data PD56 are decoded.

  Further, the configuration using a plurality of types of moving image data as described above may be applied to the jackpot effect or the notice effect before the reach, instead of the reach effect.

  According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  The NAND flash memory 102 provided in the display control device 70 has a slower data transfer rate than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, which requires a higher read speed than the NAND flash memory 102, and thus the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 72 can quickly start the process for initial activation. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial activation is stored in the NAND flash memory 102, the control in the display CPU 72 can be started smoothly.

  Further, a random accessible memory such as a NOR flash memory is used for the ROM 53 of the main control device 50, and a NAND flash memory 102 is used for the memory module 74 of the display control device 70 so that the upstream control means can operate. For a certain main control device 50, while simplifying the configuration relating to the reading of control program data, for the display control device 70 that is the control means on the downstream side, it is important to prioritize an increase in the amount of data that can be stored in advance. You can

  As described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, the display CPU 72 does not include the display target on the display screen G in a predetermined frame, but may include the display target on the display screen G in the subsequent frame. A control start process for deriving parameters is performed in advance for image data corresponding to a unique individual image. This makes it possible to disperse the control start timing so that a large number of individual images to be control-started do not exist in one processing operation, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49, scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, so that a single image data is obtained in the NAND flash memory 102. Eliminates the need to oversize the storable size. Also, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time will be lengthened, but since it can be transferred in units of divided parts data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, when displaying an animation for displacing a small unit group, a plurality of small unit images are collectively set instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite. The configuration is such that the generated still images are sequentially switched. Thereby, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55, when the effect data PD17 is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, addition processing is executed. As a result, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is displayed in a state in which the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed are reflected. Since the effect image CH2 is an image that allows objects on the far side, such as light and water droplets, to pass through, the effect image CH2 feels strange when displayed regardless of the background image. On the other hand, by performing the addition process, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, which is preferable in appearance without causing the above-described discomfort.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, in the unit area in which the effect data PD18 is drawn, the numerical information already stored therein is reduced in numerical value at the rate of the α value of the partial addition data PD19. The numerical value information obtained as a result of adding the numerical value information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical value information after the setting is set. As a result, after drawing the effect data PD18, it is possible to prevent each numerical value information of RGB in the unit area of the frame regions 82a and 82b from becoming maximum values, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of blown-out highlights.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the composite data is used in the subsequent use. As a result, the processing load of the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which a plurality of effect data is drawn each time the execution timing of a plurality of effect effects is reached.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 66, partial display of individual images such as designs and characters is performed using α data and α palette data. This allows partial display of individual images in a configuration in which the VDP 76 cannot partially handle image data. Further, these α data and α palette data have a smaller data capacity than the image data. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the image data for the whole display and the image data for the partial display are individually prepared for the individual image to be partially displayed, the increase in the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data is suppressed. Partial display of individual images can be performed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71, the background image switching is gradually performed over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, so that the background image switching mode can be made novel. In addition to this, it is possible to diversify the background image switching mode. In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 forming the image of the front side display timing are linked, and the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for wipe switching effect is individually combined for each of the image data PD39 to PD42.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, as the image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, the first sprite data having a relationship of being shifted by half a dot from each other in the movement direction of the sprite CH5. The PD 48 and the second sprite data PD 49 are stored. Then, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are alternately used. As a result, the smooth movement sprite CH5 can be displayed for each frame as if the frame areas 82a and 82b are moved by a half dot or by the display screen G as a reference by a corresponding amount. The sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79, zoom-in effect can be performed by using the scaler 97, and zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. . For example, a similar zoom-in effect can be performed by drawing each image data in an enlarged state when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b. In this case, all image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. It becomes necessary to execute processing, which increases the processing load on the VDP 76. Further, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the image data for normal size and the image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for enlarging and displaying the image is performed by the display circuit 94 instead of the control unit 91 of the VDP 76. Therefore, it is possible to perform the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are the moving image data PD54 for pre-branch corresponding to the pre-branch effect and the post-branch A's corresponding to the post-branch A effect. The moving image data PD55 and the moving image data PD56 for B after branch corresponding to the effect for B after branch are set separately. Therefore, until the branch timing, the still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 before the branch is drawn in sequence in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. Pre-production can be performed. After the branch timing, still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target of the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed only by sequentially drawing in the same frame order.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. Further, both the single moving image data in which the pre-branching effect and the after-branching A effect are set and the single moving image data in which the before-branching effect and the after-branching B effect are set are prepared in advance. It is also possible to set it up. However, since it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the first order frame, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when the super reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, it is feared that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. Compared to each of the assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are separately prepared as described above, so that the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used is switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Since it is sufficient, the above-mentioned super-reach display can be suitably executed.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display control device 190 is different from that in each of the above embodiments. FIG. 84 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display control device 190.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the display control board 191 of the display control device 190 is provided with a first display CPU 193 and a second display CPU 194 as control means for creating a drawing list and transmitting it to the VDP 192. Further, a management CPU 195 is provided to control the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194.

  The management CPU 195 determines the content of the effect based on the instruction from the sound emission control device 60 received through the input port 196, and based on the determination result, one frame for each of the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194. It provides the base information for determining the content of an image. Information corresponding to different frames is provided to the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194, and the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 correspond to the image for one frame based on the received information. The drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 192.

  The control programs of the CPUs 193 to 195 are stored in advance in the NAND flash memory of the memory module 197, and are pre-transferred to the work RAM 198 by the timing required by the CPUs 193 to 195, based on the transfer instruction from the management CPU 195. It Each of the CPUs 193-195 executes various processes while accessing the work RAM 198. Further, image data is stored in advance in the memory module 197, and the image data is pre-transferred to the expansion buffer 202 of the VRAM 201 based on a transfer instruction from the management CPU 195 by a timing required by the VDP 192. .

  The VDP 192 is provided with a first drawing unit 203 and a second drawing unit 204 in one-to-one correspondence with the display CPUs 193 and 194. The drawing list sent from the first display CPU 193 is sent to the first drawing unit 203, and the drawing list sent from the second display CPU 194 is sent to the second drawing unit 204. Here, each of the drawing units 203 and 204 may be for 3D display as in the first embodiment, or may be for 2D display as in the second embodiment.

  Each of the drawing units 203 and 204 operates individually and creates one frame of drawing data corresponding to the received drawing list in the VRAM 201. The frame buffer 205 of the VRAM 201 is provided with a first frame area 206, a second frame area 207, and a third frame area 208, and drawing data by the drawing units 203 and 204 is stored in one of the frame areas 206 to 208. Is drawn.

  The drawing units 203 and 204 and the frame regions 206 to 208 are connected through a selector unit 211, and the selector unit 211 sets the drawing targets of the drawing units 203 and 204 to any of the frame regions 206 to 208. It The display unit 212 is connected to the selector unit 211 as well as the drawing units 203 and 204, and the frame regions 206 to 208 to which the display circuit 212 outputs image signals are also switched by the selector unit 211.

  In the above configuration, the drawing units 203 and 204 create drawing data in the frame regions 206 to 208 by using the drawing period of two frames, and when comparing the drawing units 203 and 204, one frame The drawing data is created by shifting the drawing period by the time difference. That is, the creation of drawing data is completed every drawing period for one frame. Then, at each update timing, the display circuit 212 outputs the image signal with the frame area that is not the drawing target of the drawing units 203 and 204 as the output target. By creating the drawing data by the triple buffer method in this way, the image is updated at each update timing of one frame while securing the drawing period of two frames as the creation period of the drawing data of one frame. Can be made. Therefore, compared to each of the above-described embodiments, a margin is created in the period for creating drawing data, and even if a complicated image or a large-screen image is displayed, that image can be displayed well.

  In the above structure, the first drawing unit 203 alternately creates the drawing data for one frame in the first frame area 206 and the second frame area 207 in the drawing period for one frame. In the third frame area 208, one frame of drawing data may be created in a plurality of frames of drawing period. In this case, basically, the drawing data can be created by the double buffer method, and the drawing data corresponding to a particularly complicated image can be created over the drawing period of a plurality of frames.

  Further, the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be two, and the frame area may be four or more, and the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be three. In addition, it may have a configuration in which four or more frame regions are provided, or a configuration in which five display CPUs and drawing units are provided and six or more frame regions are provided. . In other words, by providing a plurality of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit and by providing the number of frame regions equal to or more than the number of combinations thereof, one frame of drawing data is created using the drawing periods of a plurality of frames. be able to.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the background arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 is different from that of the first embodiment. The calculation processing for this background will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S4601, the rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4602, various parameters of the grasped rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S4603, the background update target object is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4604, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

  Then, in step S4605, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the current processing time is the processing time for creating the drawing list corresponding to the frame at the timing immediately before the development effect. .

  The development effect is at least one of an effect in which the number of effect characters is increased, an effect in which a motion of the effect character is newly added, and an effect in which an effect character having a large processing load is displayed. It is a production corresponding to. In the development effect, the grasping process of the object corresponding to the development effect and the updating process of the control information are executed in the effect calculation process (step S504) in the task process (FIG. 12) of the display CPU 131. In addition, in the rendering setting process (step S603) in the drawing process (FIG. 14) of the VDP 135, the geometry calculation and rendering as already described for the object corresponding to the development rendering are performed.

  When it is determined in step S4605 that it is the timing immediately before the development effect, in step S4606, the separately designated execution designation information is stored, and then the present calculation process ends.

  When the background arithmetic process is executed as described above, the image data for the background corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, The separately designated execution designation information is set. By executing the background drawing data creation processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment on the drawing list in the VDP 135, the background drawing data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is separately stored. To be done. In this case, in this embodiment, a separate storage buffer is provided in the VRAM 134 instead of the mode buffer 145, and the background drawing data is separately stored in the separate storage buffer.

  If it is determined in step S4605 in the background calculation process (FIG. 85) that it is not the timing immediately before the development effect, in step S4607, the development effect is under development based on the currently set data table. Or not. If the development performance is not in progress, the present calculation processing is ended as it is. In this case, the drawing list corresponding thereto is output, so that the VDP 135 creates the drawing data for the background as usual using the specified backmost image and object.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the development effect is being performed, then in step S4608, the use designation information of the separate storage data is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

  When the background calculation process is executed as described above, at least the use designation information of the separate saved data is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. By executing the background drawing data creation processing (FIG. 25) in the VDP 135 on the drawing list, the background drawing data is not at least rendered, The separately stored background drawing data is diverted as the background drawing data in the development effect.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering of the drawing data for the background is omitted in a situation where the processing load for displaying the effect character is large. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes extremely large and processing drop occurs in the situation where the development effect is performed.

  In addition, the separately drawn background drawing data corresponds to the background image displayed in the frame immediately before the development effect is started. As a result, even if the background image is diverted during the development, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

  When the background image is an image displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction over a display period for a plurality of frames, scroll display is performed until immediately before development effect, and scroll display is performed during development effect. It will be stopped.

  Further, in the above processing configuration, the display CPU 131 may not perform the parameter calculation and update of the background image data, and the VDP 135 may not perform the geometry calculation. In this case, the processing load can be further reduced.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments independently, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in a predetermined combination. In addition, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment not illustrated as an application target of the configuration.

  (1) For the purpose of improving the data read speed in the display CPU 72, 131 or VDP 76, 135, the NAND flash memory 102, 162 is not used as the memory module 74, 133, but NOR A configuration in which data is pre-transferred or boot data is read from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to a configuration in which a randomly accessible memory such as a flash memory is used.

  (2) Focusing on the effect that the initialization process can proceed smoothly, the boot memories 119 and 179 are not provided, and the boot data is stored in the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. The boot data may be pre-transferred to the work RAMs 73 and 132 before the setting process is started. In this case, the wait processing may be executed in the display CPUs 72 and 131 until the transfer of the boot data to the work RAMs 73 and 132 is completed. In the case of the above configuration, the time from the power supply start timing to the display CPUs 72, 131 to the substantial start timing of the initial setting process is longer than that in each of the above embodiments, but the initial setting process does not proceed smoothly. It will be possible.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the program data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. Further, a part or all of the image data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162.

  (4) The boot memories 119 and 179 may be provided separately from the memory modules 74 and 133. In this case, the signal paths between the boot memories 119 and 179 and the display CPUs 72 and 131 are the signal paths between the memory modules 74 and 133 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, and the memory modules 74 and 133 and the RAMs 73 and 75. , 132, and 134, the data can be transferred from the memory modules 74 and 133 to the work RAMs 73 and 132 and the VRAMs 75 and 134 by using the period during which the boot data is read into the display CPUs 72 and 131. It will be possible.

  (5) The program data of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) may be configured only by the boot data without requiring the data of the latter half portion. In this case, it is necessary to increase the required storage capacity in the boot memories 119 and 179 as compared with the above-described embodiments, but it is not necessary to transfer the program data for the initial setting process during the initial setting process. Incidentally, in this configuration, it is necessary to set the program data for instructing the transfer of the regular program data and the regular image data in the boot data.

  (6) In addition to the memory modules 74 and 133, a memory may be provided to store image data in advance. With regard to this configuration, specifically, a NOR flash memory is provided as the above-mentioned memory, and normal image data is stored in the NOR flash memory. Then, by connecting the NOR type flash memory to the VDPs 76 and 135, when displaying an image corresponding to the normal image data, the normal image data may be read from the NOR type flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of types of memories for storing image data in advance, but it is possible to handle regular image data without transferring the regular image data when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The displayed image can be displayed well. Even with this configuration, the NOR flash memory stores only the regular image data, and the memory modules 74 and 133 store the change image data whose data capacity is likely to increase due to the diversification of effects. With the configuration, since a NOR flash memory having a small storage capacity may be used, it is possible to achieve the above effects while achieving cost reduction. Further, the above configuration may be applied to regular program data.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, when backup power is not supplied to the RAMs of the display control devices 70 and 130 and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the data groups stored in the RAMs until then are Instead of the structure in which the RAM is destroyed or erased, the RAM may be supplied with backup power.

  As a means for supplying the backup power, the power supply and firing control device 57 may also be used as a power supply unit for power supply interruption that supplies backup power to the RAM 54 of the main control device 50 or the like. An intermediate power supply unit may be provided.

  (8) The storage unit to which the program data and the image data are pre-transferred is a volatile storage unit such as a RAM if the data read speed is higher than that of the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 and overwrite is possible. Not limited.

  (9) The configuration of pre-transfer of program data and image data and the configuration of reading boot data from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to control devices other than the display control devices 70 and 130. For example, it may be applied to the sound emission control device 60. Further, it may be applied to the main control device 50, the payout control device 55 or the power supply and firing control device 57. In addition, in the configuration in which a movable object for game play operation is provided instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to a control device that drives and controls this movable object.

  (10) With respect to an image displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation over a display period for a plurality of frames, the operations in a predetermined order may be reproduced in the forward direction, and then the image may be reproduced in reverse. . In this case, since it is not necessary for the first operation and the last operation to have continuity, it is possible to facilitate the creation of image data at the designing stage as compared with the case of loop reproduction.

  (11) At the timing when the processing load on the display CPUs 72, 131 and VDPs 76, 135 increases, such as when the effect character makes a complicated motion or when the effect character increases, the character is called a background character. The character on the side not paid attention may continue to be displayed, but the motion may not be updated. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

  (12) A plurality of image data for displaying a predetermined character may be simultaneously set in the frame areas 82a and 82b. This makes it possible to display a plurality of characters while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance. Further, in this case, the image data may be set by horizontally reversing, and when performing an effect of passing a predetermined position, the coordinates may be set so that the timing of passing the position is different.

  (13) The image data in which a plurality of effect images are combined may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, the visual effect of the effect image can be enhanced while suppressing an increase in processing load.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data set in the world coordinate system. However, instead of this, all cameras set in the world coordinate system are set. A single camera may be commonly set for image data.

  (15) In the first embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is configured to be projected in the unit of the background image, the effect image, and the design image, but is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image. The projection image may be projected as a unit, the effect image and the design image may be collectively projected, or all of them may be collectively projected.

  (16) In the first embodiment, when the texture mapping process is performed, the texture may be attached only to the projected surface of a single object. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of performing the texture mapping before the projection, the texture mapping may be performed after the projection.

  (17) In the first embodiment, the display of the symbol may be performed based on arranging the data in which the two-dimensional image data is attached to the plate polygon in the world coordinate system. In this case, it is possible to change the vertex colors of the four corners of the plate polygon in order to display the pattern as if it were illuminated by light.

  (18) In the first embodiment, by combining the camera work in the world coordinate system and the enlargement / reduction of the object, a predetermined character is displayed with a certain size, and the moving distance of the character is calculated. You may perform the display effect which makes it look long.

  (19) In the case of paying attention to the characteristic configuration related to the display control using the image data in each of the above-described embodiments, the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are used as a storage unit that stores the program data and the image data in advance. The configuration and the configuration that is pre-transferred to the read RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134 are arbitrary, and a random-accessible storage unit such as a NOR flash memory is used as the storage unit that stores the program data and the image data in advance. The above characteristic configuration relating to the display control may be applied to the existing configuration or the configuration in which there is no prior transfer to the RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134.

  (20) Withholding information relating to winning in the upper working opening 23 and holding information relating to winning in the lower working opening 24 are stored separately, and pending information relating to winning in the lower working opening 24 takes precedence. A configuration in which the digestion is exhausted may be applied, or conversely, a configuration in which the pending information related to winning in the upper operation port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are arranged on the left and right. The structure may be arranged in parallel, or both of these working ports may be arranged obliquely. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operation ports may be arranged separately so that only the first operation port or only the second operation port can be won.

  Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the main display portion 33 displays the first display area for displaying the result of the judgment of the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 and the winning of the lower working opening 24. It is also possible to provide a second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is held. In this case, the variable information of the pattern is displayed in the first display area based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning on the upper operation opening 23 is the target of the winning / failing judgment or is the target of the winning / failing judgment. Is started and the stop display corresponding to the win / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended. In addition, based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower working opening 24 is the target of the hit determination or the hit determination, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the win / no judgment is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended.

  (21) Depending on whether the hold information related to winning on the upper working opening 23 is the target of the winning / disabling judgment, or the holding information related to winning on the lower working opening 24 is the target of the winning / failing judgment. The profits obtained may be different. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in each of the above-described embodiments, the number of operating ports is not limited to two and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

  (22) Instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command output from the main control device 50, based on the command output from the main control device 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device. The functions of the above may be integrated in the main control device 50, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. Further, the configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

  (23) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit when a player enters, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-ball type, for example, is equipped with a plurality of reels as a plurality of revolving bodies provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction, and starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and then stopping. After the reel is stopped by operating the switch, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a slot that gives the player benefits such as payout of medals The present invention can be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reels, the present invention can be applied to control related to image display in the display controller Can be applied.

  In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that include a take-in device and start the rotation of a reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in a storage section have been taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
Second storage means (work RAM 73, 132) that stores the information read from the first storage means and that has a faster reading speed than the case of reading from the first storage means;
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
The initial starting information used when the initial starting process is executed in the control means based on the predetermined initial starting state is stored in advance, and the speed required for reading the information is the first Third storage means (boot memories 119 and 179) faster than reading from the storage means;
Equipped with
The control means is
Specific control execution means (function for executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads out the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
Initial execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the initial startup information stored in the third storage means and executing the initial startup processing;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature A1, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit, in the second storage unit in which the speed required for reading the information is faster than when the information is read from the first storage unit. The control means is configured to read the specific information stored in the second storage means and execute the specific control. Therefore, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed.

  Further, the initial start-up information used when executing the initial start-up process is not stored in advance in the first storage means but in the third storage means in which the speed required for reading the information is faster than when the information is read out from the first storage means. Has been done. Then, the initial starting process is executed by reading the initial starting information from the third storage means. As a result, when executing the initial starting process, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial starting information to the second storage means, and therefore, from the initial starting state until the initial starting process is started. The time can be shortened.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

  The "first storage means" is a storage means used only for reading information when the control is executed by the control means, or stores and retains information even when operating power is not supplied from outside. Means for storing is included. This also applies to the following independent features.

Features A2. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Further, second storage means (work RAMs 73, 132) that stores the information read from the first storage means and that has a faster reading speed than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
The initial starting information used when the initial starting process is executed in the control means based on the predetermined initial starting state is stored in advance, and the speed required for reading the information is the first Third storage means (boot memories 119 and 179) faster than reading from the storage means;
Equipped with
The control means is
Specific control execution means (function for executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads out the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
Initial execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the initial startup information stored in the third storage means and executing the initial startup processing;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic A2, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage means, the capacity can be easily increased as compared to the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit, and the control unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit, which is faster than the case of reading the information from the first storage unit. The specific control is executed by using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory having a relatively low read speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened and the specific control can be smoothly performed. it can.

  Further, the initial start-up information used when executing the initial start-up process is not stored in advance in the first storage means but in the third storage means in which the speed required for reading the information is faster than when the information is read out from the first storage means. Has been done. Then, the initial starting process is executed by reading the initial starting information from the third storage means. As a result, when executing the initial starting process, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial starting information to the second storage means, and therefore, from the initial starting state until the initial starting process is started. The time can be shortened.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Features A3. The specific control execution means starts the specific control after the execution of the initial activation process is completed,
Further, the initial activation information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The initial execution unit refers to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the process for the initial startup, thereby transferring the specific information to the transfer unit to the second storage unit. The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, which executes a process (a process of step S310 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

  According to the characteristic A3, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the initial starting information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control during the execution of the initial starting process. Instructions are given. As a result, the specific control can be started well.

Features A4. The control means reads the post-startup information transferred to the second storage means, and executes the post-startup processing after the initial start-up processing (post-startup execution means (steps S307 to S307 in the display CPU 72, 131). A function of executing the processing of S314),
The initial activation information includes reference information for post-activation information indicating that the post-activation information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The initial execution means transfers the post-startup information to the second storage means to the transfer means by referring to the reference information for the post-startup information as at least a part of the processing for initial start-up. Is executed (the processing of step S304 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).
Furthermore, by completing the execution of the initial activation process and the post-activation process, the initial activation setting based on the initial activation state being completed in the control means is completed, and the specific control execution is performed. The means starts the specific control upon completion of execution of the initial starting process and the post-starting process, the gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2.

  According to the characteristic A4, the information used for executing and completing the initial startup setting in the control means is set separately for the initial startup information and the post-startup information. The initial activation information to be used is stored in advance in the third storage means, and the post-activation information to be used later is stored in advance in the first storage means. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the third storage means as compared with a configuration in which the initial activation information and the post-activation information are collectively stored in the third storage means in advance.

  Even with this configuration, since information for transferring post-startup information is set in the initial start-up information, it is possible to perform subsequent post-startup processing during execution of the initial start-up processing. After the necessary start-up, a transfer instruction of information is issued. As a result, the post-startup processing can be started well.

Features A5. The post-startup information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The post-startup execution unit refers to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the post-startup process to transfer the specific information to the transfer unit by the transfer unit. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which is for performing a process to be performed (a process of step S310 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

  According to the characteristic A5, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the post-startup information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control during the execution of the post-startup processing. Instructions are given. As a result, the specific control can be started well.

Features A6. The transfer means selects a storage area corresponding to the transfer instruction information from a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means based on the transfer instruction information transmitted by the control means, and the selected storage area. A management unit (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for reading out information stored in advance in the area is provided,
When the control means reads the initial activation information from the third storage means, the control means transmits corresponding transfer instruction information to the management means, and the information is read from the third storage means based on the transmission instruction information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 characterized in that the gaming machine is played.

  According to the characteristic A6, since the management unit is provided, the information transfer from the first storage unit is favorably performed in response to the transfer instruction from the control unit. In this case, the control unit may send the transfer instruction information to the management unit even when reading the information from the third storage unit. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

  Features A7. The management unit, the first storage unit, and the third storage unit are provided as a storage module (memory module 74, 133) having a common port unit (I / F 111, 171) for the control unit. The gaming machine described in Characteristic A6.

  According to the characteristic A7, the control unit is the common port of the storage module in both the case of issuing the transfer instruction from the first storage unit to the second storage unit and the case of reading the information from the third storage unit. The transfer instruction information may be transmitted to the department. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Feature A8. The first storage means is a NAND flash memory,
The transfer means is
Management information storage means (control ROM 114, 174) for storing management information in which information on a physical address of the first storage means is associated with information on a logical address transmitted by the control means,
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and at the same time, a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means Of these, management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) that executes a reading process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, which is characterized by including:

  According to the characteristic A8, a defective block may occur in the NAND flash memory, but since the management means specifies the physical address for the logical address transmitted from the control means, the information from the NAND flash memory is Good reading is performed.

Feature A9. The transfer means stores the information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address, and stores the information at a higher speed than the case of reading from the first storage means. When the information corresponding to the information of the logical address is transferred to the transfer destination, it is configured to be stored in the storage means and then transferred.
When the management unit reads the information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted from the control unit from the first storage unit and stores the information in the storage unit, the management unit corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. The game according to feature A8, which is provided with a prediction starting means (a function of executing the processing of step S107 in the controller CPUs 113 and 173) for starting the transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage means. Machine.

  According to the characteristic A9, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination. Instead, the logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, for the information corresponding to the logical address on the rear side in the reading order, the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required to read such information can be shortened.

  However, in the above configuration, the reading of the information corresponding to the first logical address greatly depends on the reading speed of the NAND flash memory. On the other hand, since the initial activation information is stored in advance in the third storage means instead of the first storage means, the initial activation process is started after the initial activation state is provided. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach the end.

Feature A10. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) is provided,
The specific control execution means is a configuration for performing display control of an image displayed on the display screen as the specific control,
As the initial activation process, the initial execution unit displays a process (initial image) for a previous stage in which the image display based on the specific control is started (steps S311 and S312 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). The game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9, which is characterized by performing processing.

  According to the characteristic A10, the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial activation process, so that the image on the display screen is displayed until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. It is possible to start displaying an image on the display screen at an earlier timing than a configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Feature A11. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) is provided, and the control means is configured to perform display control of an image displayed on the display screen,
The first storage means stores, in advance, control program data used when executing various processes in the control means, and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen.
The control unit adjusts the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is being transferred and the period during which the image data is being transferred do not overlap, and the transfer unit causes the transfer unit to perform transfer. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, which is provided with means (a function of executing step S306, step S309, step S313, etc. in the display CPU 72, 131).

  According to the characteristic A11, both the control program data and the image data are stored in the first storage means in advance, so that the storage destinations of these information can be aggregated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, so that the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information is It is possible to favorably transfer each information while suppressing complication.

Feature A12. A plurality of types of the control program data are stored, and the type of image data required for displaying an image based on the processing using the control program data is different depending on the type of the control program data,
The transfer adjusting unit transfers the control program data corresponding to the image data with priority over the transfer of the image data, and does not use the image data in a process using the control program data. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the image data is transferred while the process is being executed.

  According to the characteristic A12, the control program data corresponding to the image data is transferred with priority over the transfer of the image data, so that the occurrence of processing waiting can be suppressed. Also, in the process using the control program data, the image data is transferred while the process not using the image data is being executed, so that the display of the image using the image data is not hindered. It becomes possible to

Features A13. The initial execution means performs, as the initial activation process, a process for displaying an image (initial image) for a previous stage in which image display is started based on the specific control (steps S311 and steps in the display CPUs 72 and 131). The processing of S312) is executed,
The transfer adjusting means is an image corresponding to the image for the previous stage after the transfer of the initial activation information is completed and before the transfer of the control program data used in the specific control is started. The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that data is transferred.

  According to the characteristic A13, the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial activation process. Therefore, the image on the display screen is displayed until the image display based on the specific control is started. It is possible to start displaying an image on the display screen at an earlier timing than a configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Features A14. The control unit is a downstream control unit that performs the specific control according to instruction information transmitted based on execution of upstream processing in the upstream control unit (main controller 50),
Further, the first storage means is a NAND flash memory, and the upstream storage means (ROM 53) that stores in advance control program data used when the upstream control means performs the upstream processing is random. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, which is an accessible memory.

  According to the characteristic A14, the upstream control means can be randomly accessed for reading the control program data, thereby simplifying the configuration for reading the control program data, while the downstream control means is large. It is possible to adopt a configuration that emphasizes capacity.

Feature A15. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Further, second storage means (work RAMs 73, 132) that stores the information read from the first storage means and that has a faster reading speed than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
Equipped with
The control means is
Specific control execution means (function for executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads out the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
In the case of executing an initial starting process based on a predetermined initial starting state, when the speed transferred to the second storage means or required for reading the information is read from the first storage means. An initial execution unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads out the initial startup information stored in advance in another storage unit that is faster and executes the initial startup process;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to Feature A15, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage means, it is easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit, and the control unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit, which is faster than the case of reading the information from the first storage unit. The specific control is executed by using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory having a relatively low read speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened and the specific control can be smoothly performed. it can.

  Further, the initial starting information used when executing the initial starting process is read after being transferred to the second storage means, or the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage means. Read out from the storage means. As a result, the initial activation process can be executed well.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Feature A16. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G), first storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) in which information is stored in advance, and stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine provided with display control means (display CPUs 72, 131, VDPs 76, 135) for performing display control of an image displayed on the display screen based on the stored information,
The first storage means pre-stores control program data used when executing various processes in the display control means, and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen,
Second storage means (work RAMs 73, 132, VRAMs 75, 134) that stores the information read from the first storage means and that has a faster reading speed than the case of reading from the first storage means;
Transfer means (controllers 101, 161) for reading the necessary information from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the timing required by the display control means,
Equipped with
The display control means is configured to execute processing using the control program data transferred to the second storage means and display an image using the image data transferred to the second storage means. ,
Further, a transfer adjusting means (display) that causes the transfer means to perform transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is being transferred and the period during which the image data is being transferred do not overlap. A function of executing steps S306, S309, S313, etc. in the CPU 72, 131),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic A16, the information is stored in the second storage means at a timing earlier than the timing required by the display control means in the second storage means, which is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage means, and is displayed. The control means performs processing using the information stored in the second storage means and displays an image. Therefore, the time required for the display control unit to read the information can be shortened, and the image can be displayed smoothly.

  Further, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage means, the storage destinations of these information can be aggregated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, so that the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information is It is possible to favorably transfer each information while suppressing complication.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Feature A17. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Further, second storage means (work RAMs 73, 132) that stores the information read from the first storage means and that has a faster reading speed than the case of reading from the first storage means.
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
Equipped with
The transfer means is
Management information storage means (control ROM 114, 174) for storing management information in which information on a physical address of the first storage means is associated with information on a logical address transmitted by the control means,
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and at the same time, a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means Of these, management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) that executes a reading process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process,
Storage means (cache memories 117 and 177) for storing the information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address;
When the information corresponding to the information of the logical address is transferred to the transfer destination, the information is stored in the storage means and then transferred.
When the management unit reads the information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted from the control unit from the first storage unit and stores the information in the storage unit, the management unit corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. A gaming machine provided with a prediction starting means (a function for executing the processing of step S107 in the controller CPUs 113 and 173) for starting the transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage means.

  According to Feature A17, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage unit, it is easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit, and the control unit stores the specific information in the second storage unit, which is faster than the case of reading the information from the first storage unit. The specific control is executed by using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory having a relatively low read speed is used as the first storage means, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened and the specific control can be smoothly performed. it can.

  Further, although a defective block may occur in the NAND flash memory, since the management means specifies the physical address with respect to the logical address transmitted from the control means, it is possible to read information from the NAND flash memory well. Done.

  Further, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, not only the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination, The logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, for the information corresponding to the logical address on the rear side in the reading order, the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required to read such information can be shortened.

  The invention of the characteristic group A is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. . It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the effect mode by images and by using complex moving images and live-action images as images, it is attempted to increase the attention level of the images and accordingly the attention level of the game. Attempts are being made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is issued, it is preferable that the image is displayed early in response to the instruction. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in selecting a memory is reduced in the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and occurs similarly in configurations related to other controls.

  By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above characteristics A1 to A17, the following characteristics B1 to B13, the following characteristics C1 to C10, the following characteristics C′1, the following characteristics D1 to D10, the following characteristics E1 to E8, and the following characteristics F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display) for displaying an image on the display screen by using the image data stored in the display storage means and updating the content of the image for one frame at a predetermined update timing. CPU72, VDP76),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that a plurality of individual images in the image for one frame overlap in the depth direction of the display screen (a function for executing a writing process in the VDP 76, in the VDP 76) A function of executing the processing of step S3301, step S3305, step S3401, step S3405, step S3501 to step S3504),
When the plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, the transparency value set in a part of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side corresponds to the individual image on the back side. By setting the overlapping portion of the image data to be the display target, the transparent value adjusting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3304, S3404, and S3507 in the VDP 76) for performing partial display of the individual image on the front side. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature B1, by adjusting the transparency value of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side, the partial display of the individual image is performed. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be suppressed.

Feature B2. The image data has a large number of unit image data (pixels) associated with color information,
The display storage means stores transparency value adjustment data (partial α data PD22 to PD25, partial α data PD30 to PD33, α palette data) in which a transparent value is set corresponding to each unit image data of the image data. , The partial α data PD37, PD38) are stored in advance,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the transparency value adjusting unit applies the transparency value adjusting data to the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side to perform the partial display. .

  According to the feature B2, the transparent value adjustment data is read from the display storage unit and applied to the image data to perform the partial display, which complicates the processing configuration for performing the partial display. Can be suppressed.

Feature B3. The transparency value adjustment data is higher in transparency of the contour portion than the adjacent portion inside the unit image data corresponding to the contour portion of the region partially displayed in the front side individual image. The transparent value is set so that
Further, the individual image displayed as the individual image on the front side includes the first individual image on the front side and the second individual image on the front side, and each of the individual images on the front side has a one-to-one correspondence. The game machine according to feature B2, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is provided correspondingly.

  According to the feature B3, since the transparency value adjustment data is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first front side individual image and the second front side individual image, partial display is performed for these individual images. You can In addition, since the transparency value of each transparent value adjustment data is set so that the transparency of the outline portion of the corresponding individual image is higher than that of the adjacent portion inside thereof, the transparency value adjustment is performed to perform partial display. When the application data is applied, at the same time, it is possible to reduce jaggies in the image displayed in the part.

Feature B4. The individual image displayed as the individual image on the front side includes a first individual image on the front side (an individual image corresponding to the pattern sprite data PD26) and a second individual image on the front side (an individual image corresponding to the pattern sprite data PD27). Image) is included,
The transparency value adjustment means common to both the case where the partial display of the first front side individual image is performed and the case where the partial display of the second front side individual image is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the game data (partial α data PD30 to PD33) is applied.

  According to the feature B4, partial display can be performed for each of the first front side individual image and the second front side individual image while suppressing the storage capacity required to store the transparency value adjustment data. it can.

Feature B5. The transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to the large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Cage,
The transparency value adjusting means applies the transparency value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data to color information associated with corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, which is characterized by displaying.

  According to the feature B5, when partial display is performed, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is applied to the color information associated with each corresponding unit image data. Since this is good, it is possible to suppress the complication of the processing related to the application.

Feature B6. The image data setting means is configured to display an image for one frame based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and to store the image data in the setting storage means. When set to, the coordinate information in the setting storage means for a part of the large number of unit image data included in the image data is specified, and the image data is set at a position according to the coordinate information. Configuration,
Further, the transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of the unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Has been done,
The transparency value adjusting means applies the transparency value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data to color information associated with corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby performing the partial display. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature B6, when the image data is set in the setting storage unit, it is not necessary to specify the coordinate information for all the unit image data of the image data, so that the processing configuration related to the specification can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In this configuration, the transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to the large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. The data structure is As a result, even if the coordinate information is not individually specified for all the unit image data of the image data, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is converted into the corresponding unit. It can be applied to color information associated with image data.

Feature B7. The image data setting means is configured to display an image for one frame based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and to store the image data in the setting storage means. When set to, the parameter information including the information of the coordinates in the setting storage means of the image data is specified, and the image data is set according to the specification result,
When the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in the setting storage unit, the transparency value adjusting unit is configured to set the image data according to the specified parameter information. The game machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the transparency value adjustment data is applied to the image data at a previous timing.

  According to the characteristic B7, the predetermined parameter is applied to the image data to which the transparency value adjustment data is applied, and the data of the application result is set in the setting storage means. As a result, it is not necessary to specify the parameter for setting the transparent value adjustment data in the setting storage unit, so that the processing load for specifying the parameter can be suppressed.

Feature B8. Identification information is set individually for each unit image data,
In the transparent value adjusting data, a combination of color information and transparent value information of the unit image data in which the identifying information is set is set in association with the identifying information. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B4.

  According to the feature B8, the transparency value for partial display can be applied in addition to setting the color information in each unit image data.

  Feature B9. The transparency value adjusting means adjusts the transparency value so that the transparency of the contour part of the region partially displayed in the front individual image is higher than that of the adjacent part inside thereof. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the transparent value is adjusted to perform the partial display, the jaggies of the image displayed in the partial can be reduced together with the adjustment.

  Feature B10. The transparency value adjusting means switches the range in which the transparency value is set, in which the overlapping portion of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is set as a display target, and thereby the partial display area in the individual image on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, characterized in that

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the region that is partially displayed in the front individual image transits by simply switching the transparent value to be applied.

Feature B11. A partition area control unit (a function of the display CPU 72 that executes the process of step S3206) that controls the display unit so that a partition area (partial display area PL5) in which a partial area of the display screen is partitioned is displayed. Prepare,
The individual image on the front side is an individual image used to be displayed in the partitioned area, and the individual image on the back side is an individual image used to be displayed in a peripheral area including the periphery of the partitioned area. Image,
When the individual image on the front side is displayed so that a part of the boundary of the divided area is overlapped with the transparent value adjusting unit, the individual image on the front side does not overflow into the surrounding area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, characterized in that the individual image on the front side is partially displayed.

  According to the feature B11, the display effect in which the individual image is displayed within the range of the divided area can be performed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B12. A character color change control unit (a character transition process in the VDP 76) that displays a plurality of character images arranged in a specific direction on the display screen and controls the display unit so that the colors of the plurality of character images are sequentially changed. Function to execute
The individual image on the front side is an individual image including the plurality of character images,
The individual image on the back side is an individual image including the plurality of character images and the color of each character image is set to be different from the individual image on the front side,
The image data setting means is configured to display an image for one frame based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and the color of the character image is sequentially changed. When a display effect is performed, the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in front of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the transparent value adjusting means is for partially displaying the individual image on the front side when the display effect is performed.

  According to the feature B12, the display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed can be performed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B13. Pattern determining means (a function of executing the process of step S403 in the display CPU 72) for determining display effect pattern information composed of images for a plurality of frames based on the satisfaction of a predetermined pattern determining condition;
Derivation means for deriving the parameter information when the image data corresponding to the individual image displayed in the image of each frame is used based on the determined display effect pattern information (the task processing in the display CPU 72 is executed. Function)
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the image data setting means sets the image data in a state in which the parameter information derived by the deriving means is applied. .

  According to the feature B13, the parameter information of the image data corresponding to each frame is derived based on the previously determined display effect pattern information, and the image data is set with the parameter information applied. As a result, in the configuration in which the images for each frame are displayed, the excellent effects as described in the above feature B1 and the like can be achieved.

  The invention of the characteristic group B is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying characters and characters. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or a character in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, whereby a character or an image in which characters are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, for example, in the case of displaying an image as if the character or the character is moving in a predetermined manner in front of the background, the coordinates corresponding to the predetermined movement or Drawing data in which the character or character data is set in the form is created.

  Here, as a display effect on the display device, the present inventor transits from a state in which the entire character or character is displayed to a state in which only a part of the character or character is displayed in the process of movement of the character or character. I devised a display effect to make it.

  However, it is not preferable that the capacity of the memory for the image data extremely increases in order to perform the display effect, and it is necessary to perform the display effect while suppressing the increase in the capacity to some extent. .

  By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features B1 to B13, the above features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b), and one frame worth of data is obtained by the predetermined update timing. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the content of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of division image data (division part data PD2 to PD10, division data group PD12 to PD15) are stored in advance in the display storage means,
The display control means arranges and sets the plurality of division image data in the setting storage means side by side according to a predetermined relative position, so that the same type of display mode corresponds to each division image data. Set setting means for displaying a series of images that straddle the boundary of each divided individual image (a function of performing arithmetic processing for scroll background in the display CPU 72 or a function of performing arithmetic processing for displacement background in the display CPU 72) And a function of executing the setting process of the divided parts data in the VDP 76).

  According to the characteristic C1, the image data for displaying a series of images is divided and stored as a plurality of dividing image data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data unit when individually setting in the setting storage unit, and it is possible to reduce the processing load when handling a single image data.

  Feature C2. The set setting means sets the first dividing image data (divided part data PD5) and the second dividing image data (divided part data PD6) which are adjacent to each other in the setting storing means. In this case, the gaming machine described in the feature C1 is characterized in that an overlapping area (overlapping area PA1) of both data is generated over the entire boundary portion of the image data for division.

  According to the characteristic C2, in the configuration in which the respective pieces of image data for division are individually set in the setting storage means, for example, a gap may occur between the pieces of image data for division depending on the individual size adjustment condition of the image data for division. Is concerned. On the other hand, since both data are set in the setting storage means so that an overlapping area is generated, the above-mentioned gap does not occur, and the effect of storing as each image data for division is obtained. It can be exhibited well.

  Feature C3. In the characteristic C2, color information that is the same as each other is associated with the portions forming the overlapping area in the first division image data and the second division image data. Game machine.

  According to the characteristic C3, since the color information that is the same as each other is associated with the portions that form the overlapping area in both the image data for division, for example, the same magnification is applied to each image data for division. Even if the widths of the overlapping areas are slightly deviated by individually performing size adjustment, it is expected that the color information to be displayed as the overlapping area is reflected in the deviated portion. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a good display mode even if an image obtained as a result of setting each image data for division individually in the setting storage unit.

Feature C4. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with color information,
The overlapping region is constituted by unit image data for one column in each of the first image data for division and the second image data for division. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic C4, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting each image data for division so that the overlapping area is generated while suppressing the data capacity allocated to generate the overlapping area as much as possible.

  Feature C5. Each of the image data for division is created so that, when all of the image data for division are set in a predetermined scale, the series of images formed by the image data exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a part of each of the division image data is a display range of the image for one frame. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, which is created with a division size that is not included in the above.

  According to the characteristic C5, since the series of images generated by setting all the image data for division exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen, the images are displayed in the range exceeding the size of the display screen. It is possible for the player to recognize that the setting is made, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each image data for division is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. As a result, it is possible not to set the division image data that is not included in the display range of the image for one frame in the setting storage unit at the specific update timing, and always set all the division image data. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which.

Feature C6. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with color information,
When setting the image data in the setting storage unit, the display control unit executes a predetermined drawing process for each unit image data of the image data to obtain the color information of the unit image data. Even if the unit image data of the image data set as the setting target in the setting storage unit is set outside the setting storage unit, the color information of the unit image data is Although not set in the setting storage unit, the drawing process is executed,
Each of the image data for division is created so that, when all of the image data for division are set in a predetermined scale, the series of images formed by the image data exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a part of each of the division image data is a display range of the image for one frame. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, which is created with a division size that is not included in the above.

  According to the characteristic C6, when the image data is set in the setting storage means in the display control means, even if the image data has unit image data protruding from the setting storage means, On the other hand, the same drawing process is executed. As a result, the display control unit does not need to perform a dedicated process on the unit image data that extends from the setting storage unit.

  Further, since a series of images generated by setting all the image data for division exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen, the images are set within the range exceeding the size of the display screen. It is possible for the player to recognize that, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image. However, as described above, in the configuration in which the similar drawing process is executed for the unit image data that extends from the setting storage means, the image data forming the series of images is provided as a single image data. As a result, the frequency of wasteful execution of the drawing process is increased, and the processing load is increased.

  On the other hand, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each image data for division is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. As a result, it is possible not to set the division image data that is not included in the display range of the image for one frame in the setting storage unit at the specific update timing, and always set all the division image data. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which.

Feature C7. The set setting means,
A dividing image grasping unit (conducting a calculation process for a scroll background in the display CPU 72) for grasping a part of the dividing image data included in the display range of the image for one frame to be updated among the dividing image data. Function)
Division image setting means (function for executing division part data setting processing in the VDP 76) for setting the division image data grasped by the division image grasping means in the setting storage means,
The gaming machine according to the feature C5 or C6, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic C7, at least at the specific update timing, the image data for division not included in the display range of the image for one frame is not set in the setting storage means. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the image data for all divisions is always set.

Feature C8. Parameter information specifying means (function of executing arithmetic processing for scroll background in the display CPU 72) for specifying parameter information including information on coordinates of the image data in the setting storage means,
The display control means is a configuration for setting the image data in the setting storage means in a state in which the parameter information according to the identification result of the parameter information identification means is applied.
In the case where the parameter information specifying unit specifies the parameter information with respect to image data forming at least one frame of image corresponding to the specific update timing, the one frame of image also includes a partial area. The amusement machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, wherein the parameter information is not specified for image data for division corresponding to no individual image for division.

  According to the characteristic C8, at least at the specific update timing, the parameter information is not specified for the image data for division which is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the parameter information is always specified for all the image data for division.

  Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the series of images are images scroll-displayed in a predetermined direction over a plurality of image display periods.

  According to the feature C9, a series of images can be scroll-displayed, and the scroll display can be favorably performed because the configuration of the feature C1 and the like is provided.

Feature C10. The division image data is created so that each of the division individual images includes a plurality of unit images, and the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed over a plurality of frames. A plurality of division image data are provided corresponding to each division position so that it is possible to perform,
At each of the division positions where the division individual images are displayed side by side, each division set in the setting storage means so that the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes over the display period for a plurality of frames. The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9, which is provided with an image switching means (a function of executing a calculation process for a displacement background in the display CPU 72) for switching the image data for use.

  According to the characteristic C10, the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images is not individually set in the setting storage unit, but the display of the plurality of unit images is collectively controlled in the unit of the division image data. By doing so, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images sequentially change. As a result, in addition to the excellent effect described in the characteristic C1, it is possible to execute the display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention according to the above feature C1 is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed by using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character and the like. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, a large size image has a large amount of image data. For example, a background image that is scroll-displayed and only a part of the area is displayed on the display screen for each frame is a character image that is entirely displayed on the display screen in an initially set size. The capacity of image data becomes larger than that of.

  In this case, it is assumed that one unit of image data cannot be stored in advance in the image data memory depending on its capacity. Further, even if it can be stored, if there are many areas that are not actually displayed on the display screen, the amount of calculation for display for each frame increases, and the processing load increases. On the other hand, in the case of a large image as described above, a configuration may be considered in which the image data at the time of initial setting is always enlarged and displayed, but in that case, the image quality is degraded.

  By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features C1 to C10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C '>
Feature C'1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b), and one frame worth of data is obtained by the predetermined update timing. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the content of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores in advance aggregated image data (divided data groups PD12 to PD15) that collectively include a plurality of unit images as display targets, and display modes of the plurality of unit images in a plurality of frames. A plurality of the aggregated image data are stored so that it is possible to perform a display that changes sequentially over
Further, aggregated image switching means (for the displacement background in the display CPU 72) that switches the aggregated image data set in the setting storage means so that the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed over the display period for a plurality of frames. A function of executing the arithmetic processing of 1.).

  According to the characteristic C′1, instead of individually setting the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images in the setting storage unit, the display of the plurality of unit images is summarized in the unit of the dividing image data. It is possible to perform a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed by controlling the display mode. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention according to the above feature C'1 is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed by using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character and the like. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, the processing load for each frame increases as the number of unit images included in the image for one frame increases. On the other hand, if the number of unit images included in the image for one frame is reduced, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the image may decrease.

  By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the characteristics C′1, the characteristics A1 to A17, the characteristics B1 to B13, the characteristics C1 to C10, the following characteristics D1 to D10, the following characteristics E1 to E8, and the following characteristics F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the image data of the operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so that at least a part thereof moves in a specific direction, at least a part of the individual images moved in the specific direction by less than 1 dot. It is a configuration capable of acquiring a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the state,
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control unit displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the state of mutual movement of less than 1 dot is sequentially switched as the use target, so that at least a part of the operation individual image moves in a specific direction. Is displayed in this way. As a result, it is possible to display the image as if it were moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to achieve smooth movement of the individual motion image.

Feature D2. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In a gaming machine equipped with
At least a part of the storage means for display is 1 in the specific direction as image data of an operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction. It stores a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the state of mutual movement by less than a dot,
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control unit displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And a gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the individual motion image is moved in a specific direction by sequentially switching the plurality of motion image data corresponding to the state of mutual movement of less than 1 dot as the use target. Is displayed in this way. As a result, it is possible to display the image as if it were moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to achieve smooth movement of the individual motion image.

  Further, in this configuration, since it is only necessary to sequentially switch the plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. As described above, it is possible to favorably realize the smooth movement of the motion individual image.

Feature D3. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
The image data is set in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As image data of an operation individual image (smooth movement sprite CH5) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, at least a part of the unit setting area is one in the specific direction. The configuration is such that it is possible to acquire a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state in which they move in a small size.
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control unit displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And a gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic D3, at least one of the individual images for operation is switched by sequentially switching the plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by the size smaller than the one unit setting area. The parts are displayed as if they were moving in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as if moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the individual motion image.

Feature D4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
The image data is set in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores at least a part of the movement individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) image data that is displayed so that at least a part thereof moves in a specific direction. A plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state in which they move relative to each other by a size smaller than the unit setting area of
When at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the display control unit displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing setting processing for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And a gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic D4, at least one of the individual images for operation is switched by sequentially switching the plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by the size smaller than one unit setting area. The parts are displayed as if they were moving in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as if moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the individual motion image.

  Further, in this configuration, since it is only necessary to sequentially switch the plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. As described above, it is possible to favorably realize the smooth movement of the motion individual image.

Feature D5. The display control means determines coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means (coordinate information determination means (step S3805, step S3811, step in the display CPU 72). Function for executing the process of S3816),
When the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image is sequentially switched over the specific plurality of times of the update timing, the coordinate information determining unit determines all of the operation image data. The game machine described in the feature D3 or D4, characterized in that information of the same coordinates is applied.

  According to the characteristic D5, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area is sequentially set for the same coordinate, thereby The motion individual image can be displayed as if it is moving in units corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and the motion of the motion individual image can be smoothed.

Feature D6. The display control means determines coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means (coordinate information determination means (step S3805, step S3811, step in the display CPU 72). Function for executing the process of S3816),
The coordinate information determining means updates the information of the next coordinate after the information of the same coordinate is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, and the information of the next coordinate is not updated. The gaming machine according to the feature D3 or D4, wherein the information is updated so that the unit setting area of one of the coordinates is shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction.

  According to the characteristic D6, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area is sequentially set for the same coordinate, thereby The motion individual image can be displayed as if it is moving in units corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and the motion of the motion individual image can be smoothed.

  Further, after the information of the same coordinate is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, the information of the next coordinate is updated, and in the information of the next coordinate, the coordinate of the one before the update is changed. The unit setting area is updated so that the coordinate information is shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction. As a result, the state in which the motion individual image moves in units corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to smooth the movement of the motion individual image.

Feature D7. The display control means updates the content of the image for one frame at a predetermined update timing,
The operation image switching unit displays the plurality of operation image data when the operation individual image is displayed so that at least a part of the operation individual image moves in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D6, characterized in that it is repeatedly set in a predetermined order in the setting storage means.

  According to the characteristic D7, the processing load can be reduced because the processing of repeatedly switching the operation image data set in the setting storage means in a predetermined order can be executed.

  Feature D8. The at least a part of the plurality of operation image data is specified by changing the transparency value indicating the transmission ratio of the image data that overlaps on the back side at the position forming the edge portion of the corresponding operation individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3 to D7, which corresponds to a state in which the units move in the direction of a smaller amount than one unit setting area.

  According to the characteristic D8, by a simple method of making the transparent values of the portions forming the edge portion different, for a plurality of movements corresponding to a state in which the sizes are smaller than one unit setting area Image data can be provided.

  Feature D9. The plurality of operation image data are stored in the display storage unit in advance, and the first operation image data (first sprite data PD48) and the first operation image data are stored more than the first operation image data. At least a part of the second operation image data (second sprite data PD49) corresponds to a state of moving in the specific direction by a size smaller than one unit setting area. The gaming machine described in any one of the features D3 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, only the first operation image data and the second operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage means as the operation image data for smoothing the movement of the operation individual image. Since it suffices to keep it in advance, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing the operation image data in the display storage means.

  Feature D10. The second operation image data corresponds to a state in which the at least a part of the second operation image data has moved in the specific direction by a size that is half or substantially half of one unit setting area. The gaming machine described in Feature D9.

  According to the characteristic D10, the setting target in the setting storage means is switched from the first operation image data to the second operation image data, and when the second operation image data is changed to the first operation. It is possible to make the movement amount of the operation individual image the same or substantially the same as when the image data is switched to the special image data.

  The configuration limited to any one of the features D5 to D10 may be applied to the features D1 or D2. In this case, the configuration defined based on "one unit setting area" may be applied as the configuration defined based on "one dot".

  The invention of the characteristic group D is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed by using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character and the like. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, for example, when an image in which a character or the like is moving in a predetermined manner is displayed in front of the background, each time the display device is updated, a coordinate or a form corresponding to the predetermined movement is displayed. The drawing data in which the data of the above characters and the like are set is created. Then, each time the drawing data is created, a new signal is output to the display device, and the image on the display screen is updated so that the character or the like makes a predetermined movement.

  Here, when a character or the like is to be moved in a predetermined direction on a display screen configured by arranging a large number of dots, the minimum movement unit that can be set at one update timing is limited to one dot. It Then, even if an attempt is made to smoothly move a character or the like in a predetermined direction, a limitation occurs. This is also the same as when a character or the like tries to perform a predetermined motion. In order to solve this, a measure to increase the number of dots included in the unit area can be considered, but the cost of the display device increases as the number of dots increases.

  By the way, for any one of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a, 142b), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Depth information determining means (in the display CPU 131) for determining information in the depth direction of image data corresponding to each individual image of a plurality of individual images displayed in the image of one frame so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen. A function of executing the processing of steps S503 to S505),
By setting the image data corresponding to each individual image in the setting storage unit by applying the information in the depth direction determined by the depth information determination unit, each individual image is displayed in the depth direction on the display screen. Image data setting means (a function for executing hidden surface processing using the Z buffer in the VDP 135) so as to be displayed so as to be overlapped with
Partial display of the specific individual image is performed by determining the information in the depth direction applied to a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image as information for partial display. Partial display setting means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for mask in the display CPU 131),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic E1, the partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the information in the depth direction of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be suppressed.

  Feature E2. The partial display setting means may switch the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine described in Characteristic E1.

  According to the feature E2, the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched using the single specific image data. Thereby, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage unit.

  Feature E3. The partial display setting means gradually switches the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data, thereby displaying the specific individual image in a display period for a plurality of frames. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, which is characterized by gradually erasing or gradually appearing.

  According to the feature E3, a display effect in which a specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over a display period of a plurality of frames is performed, so that the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image increases according to the number of frames in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is performed by adjusting information, and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data according to each display mode. Therefore, the display effect as described above can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

Feature E4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a, 142b), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on the above;
Equipped with
The image data includes image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information,
The display control means,
Arranging means for arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Distance information determining means for determining distance information corresponding to a relative distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint faces (function of executing steps S503 to S505 in the display CPU 131);
The drawing data is set in the setting storage unit using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and a plurality of the drawing data are arranged in a direction in which the viewpoint faces. When the image data is lined up, the distance information is compared in each of the lined parts, and the part having the closer relative distance is preferentially set in the setting storage means (drawing setting means (Z buffer in VDP135). Function to execute hidden surface processing using
By setting the distance information determined by the distance information determination means to be information for partial display for a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image, Partial display setting means for performing partial display (function of executing arithmetic processing for masking in the display CPU 131),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic E4, the partial information of the individual image is displayed by adjusting the distance information of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be suppressed. Particularly, according to the present configuration, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained by utilizing the configuration of hidden surface removal for displaying a three-dimensional image.

  Feature E5. The partial display setting unit switches a range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching a range in which the distance information is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to feature E4.

  According to the feature E5, the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched using the single specific image data. Thereby, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage unit.

  Feature E6. The partial display setting means stepwise switches the range in which the distance information is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data, thereby displaying the specific individual image over a display period of a plurality of frames. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, characterized in that the gaming machine is gradually erased or gradually emerges.

  According to the characteristic E6, since the display effect in which the specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over the display period of a plurality of frames is performed, the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image increases according to the number of frames in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is performed by adjusting information, and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data according to each display mode. Therefore, the display effect as described above can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

  Feature E7. The information for partial display is set as distance information corresponding to the fact that the relative distance is longer than the rear image data forming the rear image in the image for one frame. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  Since the back image is an image that always forms the back of one frame of image, it serves as an absolute reference as a position in the depth direction. In this case, according to the feature E7, the partial display information is set as the distance information corresponding to the fact that the relative distance is larger than the rear image data, so that the partial display of the specific individual image is performed. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the setting of the information for partial display.

Feature E8. The display screen is composed of a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and the setting storage means has a large number of unit setting areas,
The display control means outputs an image signal corresponding to the data of each unit setting area in the drawing data set in the setting storage means to the display means, thereby generating an image corresponding to the data of each unit setting area. The output is performed at each dot corresponding to each unit setting area,
The distance information determining means determines the distance information in association with each of a large number of unit image data forming the image data,
Further, there is a large number of comparison areas corresponding to the large number of unit setting areas, and the comparison storage means (Z buffer 143) in which the distance information referred to by the drawing setting means is stored in each of the comparison areas. ),
The drawing setting means,
When a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint faces, the distance information is compared individually for each of the unit setting areas,
When performing an individual comparison, if the distance information referred to at a later timing is closer to the relative distance than the distance information previously referred to and stored in the corresponding comparison area, then, The distance information referred to at the timing is overwritten in the comparison area, and the unit image data whose distance information is determined is overwritten in the unit setting area corresponding to the comparison area. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristic features E4 to E7.

  According to the feature E8, the excellent effect as described in the feature E4 and the like can be obtained by utilizing the hidden surface erasing configuration using the comparison storing means.

  The invention of the characteristic E group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, the present inventor, when causing an individual image individually defined such as a character or a character to appear or be erased on the display screen, displays the entire display and partial display of the individual image. We devised a display effect that switches between display and display.

  However, if a plurality of types of image data are required for the same type of individual image in order to perform the display effect, the mode of switching between the overall display and the partial display becomes multi-stage. The number of types of image data stored in advance increases. This undesirably increases the storage capacity required for the image data memory.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the display of a three-dimensional image, but occurs similarly when a two-dimensional image is displayed.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E8, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the following features F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory modules 74, 133) that stores image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b, frame areas 142a and 142b), and the predetermined update timing is set. Display control means (display CPUs 72, 131, VDPs 76, 135) for updating the content of the image for one frame,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores in advance a plurality of types of image data corresponding to different individual images,
The display control means,
Grouping means for grouping a plurality of types of image data (a function of executing the process of step S3105 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S3706 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S1404 in the VDP 135),
Grouping data setting means for setting the grouped data formed by grouping in the setting storage means (a function of executing the process of step S3106 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S1905 in the VDP 76, and a VDP 135). A function of executing the process of step S1405),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of image data as a single data by grouping the plurality of types of image data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which image data is always handled individually. Moreover, since the plurality of types of image data are individually stored in the display storage means, it is possible to handle the image data independently. This allows the image data to be handled flexibly. Furthermore, the storage capacity required in the display storage means can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the data in which the plurality of types of image data are grouped is stored in the display storage means in advance.

  As described above, when a plurality of individual images are displayed at the same time, the processing load for displaying the individual images can be reduced.

Feature F2. A grouping storage area (composite data area 81c, mode buffer 145) for storing the grouped data grouped by the grouping means,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature F2, the grouped data is stored in the grouping storage area, and is read from the grouping storage area and set in the setting storage means as needed. Thereby, the grouped data can be used for a plurality of frames.

  Feature F3. When a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are set targets to the setting storage unit, the grouping unit performs grouping on the plurality of types of image data, and after the grouping, The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein image data is stored in the storage area for grouping as the grouping data.

  According to the feature F3, when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are set targets to the setting storage unit, the plurality of types of image data are grouped to be grouped data. It is stored in the storage area for grouping. This eliminates the need to independently set the processing timing for grouping.

Feature F4. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, the first display effect and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are larger than the first display effect, or an image is stored in the setting storage unit. And a second display effect in which a processing load of the display control unit when setting data is larger than an individual image displayed in the first display effect is displayed.
The grouping unit performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the first display effect is performed, and the image data after the grouping is used as the grouping data. Store in the grouping storage area,
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature F2 or F3, which is set in the setting storage means.

  According to the characteristic F4, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouped data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. As a result, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouped data.

Feature F5. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first display effect and a second display effect that increases the processing load of the display control unit when the image data is set in the setting storage unit. , Are set,
The grouping unit performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the first display effect is performed, and the image data after the grouping is used as the grouping data. Store in the grouping storage area,
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature F2 or F3, which is set in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature F5, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouped data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. As a result, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouped data.

Feature F6. The display control means creates the drawing data for one frame in the setting storage means by setting the image data, and outputs the image signal according to the drawing data to the display means. It is a configuration to display an image for one frame on the display screen,
At least the frame at the start timing in the second display effect includes a plurality of types of common individual images displayed at the frame at the end timing in the first display effect,
When the drawing data corresponding to the frame at the end timing is created based on the image data corresponding to the common individual images being set in the setting storage unit, the grouping unit sets the common data Image data corresponding to the individual images of are grouped and stored in the storage area for grouping as the grouped data,
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means when the drawing data corresponding to the start timing frame is created. The gaming machine according to feature F4 or F5.

  According to the feature F6, even if a plurality of types of common individual images are displayed by using grouping data in the frame of the start timing in the second display effect, the grouping data has the end timing in the first display effect. Since it is created based on the frame of, the display between both frames will correspond. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature F7. The gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein the plurality of types of common individual images are individual images forming a background image.

  According to the characteristic F7, since the grouped data is applied to the background image, even if a common individual image used in different frames is displayed, it becomes unnoticeable and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while suppressing the holding.

Feature F8. The display control means creates the drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data, and outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means to display 1 on the display screen. It is a configuration that displays images for frames,
A plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set,
An operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player,
Display mode switching means for sequentially switching the display modes on the basis of the operation being accepted by the operation accepting means (a function of executing processing corresponding to an operation generation command in the display CPU 131);
Equipped with
The grouping means performs the grouping on a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image of one frame included in the display mode, at least in a specific display mode among the plurality of types of display modes. The image data after the grouping is stored in the group storage area as the grouped data,
The grouping data setting means is stored in the grouping storage area when the specific display mode is switched and the drawing data corresponding to the frame immediately after the switching is created. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F7, characterized in that the grouped data corresponding to the specific display mode is set in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature F8, since a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set, the display modes can be diversified. In this case, the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is created, and the grouping data is created when the drawing data corresponding to the frame immediately after the switching to the specific display mode is created. Is used. As a result, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operation receiving unit at an arbitrary timing, the processing load at that time can be reduced.

Feature F9. In each of the plurality of types of display modes, a display effect in which the variation individual image is variably displayed in front of the background image is set over a period of a plurality of frames,
The plurality of types of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other,
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the grouped data corresponding to the specific display mode is a group of a plurality of types of image data for displaying a background image of the specific display mode.

  According to the feature F9, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the operation at any timing on the operation receiving unit, by using the grouped data for the background image, The processing load at that time can be reduced. In addition, even if switching to the specific display mode occurs while the variable individual image is being displayed in a variable manner, the grouping data corresponds to the background image as described above, so the variation of the individual image for fluctuation is changed. It is possible to switch only the background image while maintaining the display and suppressing the processing load.

Feature F10. The display modes of the plurality of types are set such that at least the types of the background images are different from each other and the types of the individual images for variation are also different from each other,
Further, in the variation display mode of the variation individual image, after the variation individual image is variably displayed in a low identification mode which is relatively difficult to identify, the variation individual image is highly identifiable relatively easily. The mode that is variably displayed in the mode is included,
In the case where the changing individual image is changed and displayed in the low discrimination mode, and the specific display mode is changed, and the drawing data corresponding to the frame immediately after the change is created, the change Adjusting means (display) immediately after the mode switching for setting the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means without changing the type of the individual image for display. The game machine according to Feature F9, which is provided with a function of executing a display mode background calculation process and a symbol calculation process in the CPU 131.

  According to the feature F10, when the changing individual image is changed to the specific display mode in the state of being changed and displayed in the low identification mode, the grouping data is used for the background image and the changing individual image up to that time is used. The data set in the display mode is used. As a result, the processing load when switching to the specific display mode can be reduced. Further, in the situation where the variable individual image is variably displayed in the low identification mode, the type of the variable individual image is switched to the one corresponding to the specific display mode as described above, because the variable individual image has low distinguishability. Even if there is not, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature F11. The individual image, when displayed on the display screen, includes an effect image displayed in a state in which the color information of the individual image overlapping on the back side thereof is reflected,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the plurality of types of image data grouped by the grouping unit includes image data corresponding to the effect image.

  According to the feature F11, a plurality of types of effect images can be used individually, and a plurality of types of effect images can be used in a grouped state.

Feature F12. When the plurality of types of image data are grouped, the grouping unit sets a part of the plurality of types of image data as reference image data and the rest as subordinate image data to perform the grouping, thereby grouping data. Create
When the grouped data setting unit sets the grouped data in the setting storage unit, the grouped data sets parameter information specified for the reference image data, the reference image data, and the dependent images dependent on the reference image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, which is set in the setting storage means in a state of being applied to data.

  According to the feature F12, when a plurality of types of image data are handled, if the parameter information is set in the reference image data, it is also applied to the subordinate image data, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F13. A plurality of types of front side image data (image data PD39 to PD42) used to display the front side image included in the image for one frame and the one frame image are stored in the display storage unit. A plurality of types of rear side image data (image data PD43 to PD45) used for displaying a rear side image included in an image for a subsequent frame are stored in advance,
The grouping means creates grouped data by performing grouping on the plurality of types of front side image data,
The grouping data setting means,
The plurality of types of rear side image data are set in the setting storage unit, and the grouping data to which the parameter information is applied so that a part of the front side image is hidden is set to the plurality of types of rear side image data. Duplication setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3702 to S3705 in the VDP 76) that sets the image data to overlap before the side image data,
A frame switching unit (a function of executing the process of step S3708 in the VDP 76) for performing the setting by the duplication setting unit so that the non-display range is widened over the display period for a plurality of frames;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F12, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F13, the wipe effect can be performed while reducing the processing load.

Feature F14. The display control means,
Setting object grasping means (a function of executing the processing of step S3102 in the VDP 76) for grasping the image data to be set in the setting storage means,
With respect to the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means, derivation means for deriving parameter information that determines a setting mode when the image data is set in the setting storage means (the processing of step S3003 in the display CPU 72 is executed. Function),
Image data setting means for setting the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means in the setting storage means in a state where the parameter information derived by the deriving means is applied (function of executing step S1905 of the VDP 76). )When,
Equipped with
The game according to any one of features F1 to F13, wherein the grouping unit groups a plurality of types of image data in a state in which the parameter information derived by the deriving unit is applied. Machine.

  According to the feature F14, the parameter information has already been applied to the plurality of types of image data in the grouped state, so that when the grouped data is used, the plurality of types of image data included in the grouped data are individually It is not necessary to apply parameter information. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F15. The image data includes image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information for displaying an image,
The display control means,
Arranging means for arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for setting the drawing data in the setting storage means using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint (steps S610 to S610 in the VDP 135). And a function for executing the processing of S613),
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14, wherein the grouping unit groups the data after the plurality of types of image data are projected on the projection plane.

  According to the feature F15, when using grouped data, it is not necessary to perform geometry calculation or rendering for a plurality of types of image data included therein. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

  The invention of the characteristic group F is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device is updated in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be performed. For example, in the configuration in which only one frame buffer is set for the VRAM in which the drawing data is created, the drawing data is created within the range of one update cycle, and the signal output based on the drawing data is performed. Need to be completed. In addition, for example, in a configuration in which a plurality of frame buffers are set, in the situation where a signal is output based on drawing data created in one frame buffer, it corresponds to the next update cycle with respect to another frame buffer. It is necessary to create drawing data.

  In any of the above configurations, in order to simultaneously display the individually specified individual images on the display screen, the coordinates and size of each individual image are specified, and all of these individual images are drawn in the frame buffer. If it is necessary to perform this, the processing load required to create the drawing data for one frame increases. When the processing load exceeds the update cycle, processing omission occurs.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F15, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the following characteristics G1 to G9, the following characteristics H1 to H11, the following characteristics I1 to I10, the following characteristics J1 to J13, the following characteristics K1 to K9, and the following characteristics L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
A display storage unit (memory module 133) that stores in advance a plurality of types of image data including image data of an object that is three-dimensional information;
Arranging means for arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for setting the drawing data in the setting storage means using the projection data created by projecting the image data on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint (steps S610 to S613 in the VDP 135). Function to execute processing),
Image signal output means (display circuit 155) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a connected object that has a plurality of partial objects sandwiching a predetermined connected portion between them, and that is capable of displacing the relative positions of the partial objects with reference to the connected portion. ,
Further, as the connected objects used when displaying the same type of special characters, a plurality of types of special connected objects (connected objects PC35, PC36) having different positions where the connecting portions are set are the display storage means. Is stored in advance in
Connected object switching means for switching the connected object used when displaying the special character to any one of the plurality of types of special connected objects (function of executing steps S1707, S1716, and S1723 in the display CPU 131). ) Is equipped with a gaming machine.

  According to the feature G1, one of a plurality of types of special connection objects is used to display the same type of special character. Then, the plurality of types of special connection objects have different positions at which the connection parts are set. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of a single special-purpose linked object as compared to a configuration in which a single special-purpose linked object in which those linked parts are collectively set is provided, and one special-purpose linked object can be read out. Can be satisfactorily performed. Further, by providing a plurality of types of special connection objects as described above in the development stage of the gaming machine, it becomes easy to adjust the movement of the special character when developing the gaming machine.

  As described above, the connected object can be handled well.

Features G2. The plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connected object switching means is configured to switch the object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object at a specific display switching timing,
The arranging means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. , An overlapping arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1802 and S1803 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine described in the feature G1.

  According to the feature G2, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object at the specific display switching timing, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before the specific display switching timing. As a result, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second linked object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the already placed second linked object can be updated. Just go. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which both the arrangement process and the update process of the second connected object are performed at a specific display switching timing.

Features G3. Parameter updating means for updating parameter information including at least information on coordinates and angles of objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to change the display content of the image (processing of steps S1805, S1813, and S1819 in VDP135). Function to execute
The processing load for updating the parameter information of the object is smaller than the processing load for starting the placement of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space,
Further, the plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connected object switching means is configured to switch the object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object at a specific display switching timing,
The arranging means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. , An overlapping arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1802 and S1803 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine described in the feature G1.

  According to the feature G3, at the specific display switching timing, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before the specific display switching timing. As a result, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second linked object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the already placed second linked object can be updated. Just go. Therefore, the processing load at a specific display switching timing can be reduced.

  Features G4. The parameter updating unit may be configured such that the first connected object and the second connected object are both arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space and the first display switching timing is earlier than the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein not only the connected object but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated.

  According to the feature G4, not only the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated before the specific display switching timing. This makes it possible to use the parameter information that has been updated up to that point in the case of a specific display switching timing, thus reducing the processing load at that timing.

Features G5. Derivation means (a function for executing arithmetic processing for the connected object in the display CPU 131) for deriving the parameter information of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the display content of the image to be updated,
The parameter updating unit updates the parameter information derived by the deriving unit as parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the first connected object and the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space. The parameter information determined by the deriving unit for the first connected object is set to the first connected object at a timing before the specific display switching timing when both of the two connected objects are arranged. And the gaming machine according to feature G4, which is updated as parameter information of both the second connected object.

  According to the feature G5, the configuration of the feature G4 is provided, and in the configuration in which the parameter information of the second linked object is updated even before the specific display switching timing, the second linked object has the second parameter information as parameter information. Parameter information of one connected object is used. As a result, as compared with the configuration in which the parameter information is individually applied to each of the first connected object and the second connected object at a timing before the specific display switching timing, the parameter information before the specific display switching timing can be set. The processing load at the timing can be reduced.

  Features G6. The features G2 to G5 are characterized in that the overlapping placement unit places the second connected object so that the second connected object is placed at the same coordinates as the coordinates at which the first connected object is placed in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature G6, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing, the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the first connected object. , The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the coordinates are individually specified for the second connected object.

Features G7. By adjusting the transparency value information applied to the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the transparency value setting means (in the VDP135) for setting the object to be displayed or hidden on the display screen. A function of executing the processing of step S1804, step S1812, and step S1818),
The linked object switching means sets the transparent value information in which the first linked object is the display target and the second linked object is the non-display target to the linked objects at a timing before the specific display switching timing. The transparent value information in which the first linked object is the non-display target and the second linked object is the display mode after the specific display switching timing is set in the linked objects. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G2 to G6.

  According to the characteristic G7, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged before the specific display switching timing, the switching of the connected object to be displayed before and after the specific display switching timing is applied to each connected object. It is performed only by switching the transparent value information to be performed. As a result, the processing load associated with switching the linked object to be displayed can be reduced.

Features G8. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are increased as compared with the first specific display effect. Alternatively, the second specific display effect (second effect) in which the processing load when setting the image data in the setting storage means is larger than the individual image displayed in the first specific display effect is displayed. Period) and are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

  According to the characteristic G8, since the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load at the timing is extremely increased. Since the G2 configuration is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

Features G9. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and a second specification that increases a processing load when setting the image data in the setting storage unit. Display effect (second effect period) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

  According to the characteristic G9, since the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load at the timing is extremely increased. Since the G2 configuration is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

  The invention of the characteristic group G is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is attached to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting an object to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, as a character object, a connected object having a plurality of partial objects with a predetermined connecting portion sandwiched therebetween and capable of displacing the relative positions of the partial objects with reference to the connecting portion is set. By keeping the above, the movement of the character can be made smooth. However, in connection with the connection object having the connection portion as described above, the creation in the gaming machine development stage is complicated as compared with the object having no connection portion. Under such circumstances, if it is desired to change the movement of the character in the course of developing the game machine, if the linked object is recreated from the beginning, the development period will be prolonged. On the other hand, if the connection part is set so as to correspond to all movements from the beginning, the data capacity of the connection object will increase accordingly.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is generated. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on output to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting the image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images in the image for one frame overlap in the depth direction of the display screen (the processing of steps S2504 to S2505 in the VDP 76 is executed. Function for executing the processing of steps S2803 to S2804 in the VDP 76),
Regarding the data of the unit setting area in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping position of the back side individual image is reflected in the image data of the overlapping position of the front side individual image. An overlapping reflection unit (a function for executing the first effect addition processing in the VDP 76, a function for executing the second effect addition processing in the VDP 76), which brings about the above-mentioned state,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature H1, when a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction in the image for one frame, the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image. It has the function of displaying in the open state. As a result, when the front side individual image is displayed, it is possible to display it in a state in which the color of the back side individual image and the like are reflected, and it is possible to display a visually preferable image.

Features H2. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplicate reflection means is
Arithmetic processing executing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of the unit image data which are mutually overlapped in the plurality of individual images (a function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the VDP 76, a step S2906 of the VDP 76). Function to execute processing),
Setting processing execution means for setting the data of the calculation result of the calculation processing to the unit setting area corresponding to each of the unit image data overlapping each other in the setting storage means (VDP76, function of executing step S2605, VDP76 Function for executing the process of step S2907 in step S2907),
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic H2, the arithmetic processing is executed by using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction, so that the excellent effect as described in the characteristic H1 can be obtained.

Features H3. Each unit setting area has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. A configuration for outputting the image signal so that a bright color is displayed in the dots,
A characteristic H2 is characterized in that the arithmetic processing execution unit executes, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic H3, when an image for one frame is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which the numerical information of large numerical value is set is brighter in color. Is displayed, the complication of the display control of the dot can be suppressed. In the configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of the respective unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that of the image data of the front individual image. Numerical information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image that reflects the color and brightness of the back-side individual image at the overlapping portion. As a result, the relationship between the numerical value information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical value information is used, and further, a relatively simple arithmetic process of addition process is used, as described in the characteristic H1. An excellent effect can be achieved.

  Features H4. When the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image is reflected to the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image by the overlap reflecting means, the ratio of the reflection of the back side image data is reduced. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, which is provided with a reflection reducing unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2902 to S2904 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature H4, it is possible to reflect the image data of the individual image on the back side in the image data of the individual image on the front side in a state where the ratio of reflecting the image data of the individual image on the back side is reduced. Thereby, for example, when the image data of the back side individual image is reflected as it is, when the front side individual image cannot be displayed satisfactorily, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image is reduced to It is possible to favorably display the front-side individual image in a state in which the side individual image is reflected.

Features H5. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplication setting means,
Arithmetic processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2906 in the VDP 76) that executes a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of the unit image data that overlap each other in the plurality of individual images;
Setting processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2907 in the VDP 76) for setting the data of the calculation result of the calculation processing in the setting storage means in the unit setting area corresponding to each of the unit image data overlapping each other; ,
A reflection reducing unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2902 to S2904 in the VDP 76) that reduces the numerical information of the back-side individual image among the unit image data to be calculated by the calculation process.
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic H5, by performing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic H1 can be obtained.

  Further, it is possible to reflect the image data of the front side individual image in a state where the ratio of the image data of the back side individual image reflected is reduced. Accordingly, for example, when the image data of the back side individual image cannot be displayed properly when the image data of the back side individual image is reflected as it is, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image is reduced to reduce the back side individual image. It is possible to favorably display the front side individual image in a state in which the individual image is reflected.

  In particular, since the target for which numerical information is reduced in arithmetic processing is not the front side individual image but the back side individual image, it is possible to suppress the color tone of the front side individual image that is positively added in front of the back side individual image. , The back side individual image can be reflected.

Features H6. Each unit setting area has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. A configuration for outputting the image signal so that a bright color is displayed in the dots,
The arithmetic processing execution means is configured to execute, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images,
The gaming machine according to Feature H5, wherein the reflection reducing unit reduces the numerical value information of the back-side individual image in each unit image data to be added in the addition process at a predetermined rate.

  According to the feature H6, when an image for one frame is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, a dot corresponding to a unit setting area in which numerical information of large numerical value is set has a brighter color. Is displayed, the complication of the display control of the dot can be suppressed. In the configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of the respective unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that of the image data of the front individual image. Numerical information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image that reflects the color and brightness of the back-side individual image at the overlapping portion. As a result, the relationship between the numerical value information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical value information is used, and further, a relatively simple arithmetic process of addition process is used, as described in the characteristic H1. An excellent effect can be achieved.

  However, in the configuration in which the addition processing of the numerical information is executed as described above, it is assumed that the numerical information of the result of the addition processing exceeds the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, and then the display of the front side individual image is performed. You will not be able to do well. On the other hand, it is possible to reflect the numerical information of the unit image data of the back side individual image in the image data of the front side individual image in a state of being reduced at a predetermined rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the numerical information of the result of the addition process from exceeding the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, and it is possible to favorably display the front side individual image in which the back side individual image is reflected. Become.

Features H7. The display storage means stores in advance transparent value adjustment data (partial addition data PD19) in which a transparent value is set corresponding to each unit image data of the front side individual image,
The reflection reduction unit is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the front side individual image and the unit image data for which the arithmetic processing is executed in the image data of the back side individual image. The gaming machine according to feature H5 or H6, wherein each transparent value that is applied is applied.

  According to the characteristic H7, in order to reduce the ratio of reflecting the back-side individual image, the transparency value adjustment data may be read from the display storage means and applied to the image data of the back-side individual image. The complication of the processing for reducing the ratio can be suppressed.

Features H8. The setting storage means is provided with coordinate specifying means for specifying coordinates when setting the image data (a function for executing a calculation process for the second effect effect in the display CPU 72).
The reflection reduction unit is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the front side individual image and the unit image data for which the arithmetic processing is executed in the image data of the back side individual image. Feature H7 is characterized in that the transparency value adjusting data is set for the coordinates identified in the front side individual image by the coordinate identifying unit so that each transparency value is applied. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic H8, when the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image is reduced, the transparency value adjustment data is read from the display storage means, and the transparency value adjustment data is further used as the image data of the front side individual image. Since it is only necessary to set the same coordinates as the coordinates to be set, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing for reducing the ratio.

  Feature H9. The front side individual image has an effect image (effect image CH2) having a large number of unit image data in which numerical value information defining color information is associated as image data and a transparent value applied to the numerical value information is set. ) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

  According to the feature H9, the effect image can be displayed well.

Feature H10. The effect image is used to produce a visual effect on a predetermined base image (character CH1),
The game data according to Feature H9, wherein the display storage unit stores image data of the base image (sprite data PD16) and image data of the effect image (effect data PD17) separately. Machine.

  According to the characteristic H10, when the base image is displayed, it is possible to display the base image alone and also to display the effect image applied to the base image.

Feature H11. The unit image data is configured to be associated with numerical information that defines color information and to set a transparent value applied to the numerical information,
In the case where the plurality of individual images overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data setting unit corresponds to the transparent portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the front individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion. If the value is not set, the unit image area of the setting destination, set the unit image data of the front side individual image in a state of not reflecting the unit image data of the back side individual image,
In the case where the plurality of individual images overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, the overlapping reflection unit corresponds to the overlapping portion, and the transparency value corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the front individual image. If is set, for the unit setting area of the setting destination, the unit image data of the back side individual image to the unit image data of the front side individual image with the transparent value applied to the numerical information The game machine according to any one of the features H1 to H10, characterized in that the data in a state in which is reflected is set.

  According to the feature H11, it is possible to determine whether or not to reflect the image data of the back side individual image based on the setting status of the transparency value for the unit image data of the front side individual image, and the process related to the determination. The complexity of the configuration is suppressed.

  The invention of the characteristic group H is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, as a kind of display effect, a smoke screen may be displayed to represent the appearance of an explosion. In addition, clouds may be displayed to indicate that the weather is cloudy, or rain may be displayed to indicate that it is raining. These individual images are displayed auxiliary in front of the background and the character. In this case, if the individual image is displayed regardless of the background and the color tone of the character, the player may feel uncomfortable, which is not preferable.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H11, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) in which image data is stored in advance in association with individual images individually displayed on the display screen;
Setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) in which drawing data is set using the image data;
Derivation means (function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72) for deriving parameter information including coordinate information of the setting destination of the image data in the setting storage means,
Creating the drawing data by setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. Display control means (VDP76) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The derivation means,
When there is image data for which the derivation of the parameter information should be newly started, a derivation starting unit (in the display CPU 72, which executes derivation start processing for newly starting the derivation of the parameter information for the image data). A function of executing the processing of steps S2012 to S2014),
With respect to the image data for which the derivation start process has already been completed, an update derivation unit that executes the update process for updating the parameter information in accordance with the change in the display content of the image (in steps S2015 to S2017 in the display CPU 72) Function to execute processing),
Corresponding to individual images that are not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but may be included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frames. A preliminary derivation means (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S2007 to S2011) for executing the derivation start processing on the image data thus obtained;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic I1, the drawing data is created by setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and the image signal is output to the display means according to the drawing data. By doing so, an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen.

  In the above configuration, the derivation unit starts the derivation of the parameter information by executing the derivation start process for the image data when the image data for which the derivation of the parameter information should be newly started exists, and then At the image update timing of, the parameter information having started the derivation may be updated. With this, when a predetermined individual image is displayed over a display period for a plurality of frames, it is not necessary to repeatedly perform the process of newly setting the parameter information on the image data of the individual image, and it is already set. It is sufficient to repeatedly update the parameter information that has been set.

  In addition, in the frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, it corresponds to an individual image that is not included in the display target on the display screen but may be included in the display target in the subsequent frame. The derivation start process may be performed on the image data. This makes it possible to complete the derivation start process for the individual images outside the display screen in advance. For example, when there are many individual images to be displayed on the display screen, those individual images It is possible to disperse the execution timing of the derivation start process so as to avoid the derivation start process from being executed simultaneously for the image data.

  As described above, the processing load for displaying an image can be reduced.

  Feature I2. The preliminary derivation means corresponds to an individual image which is included in the display target on the display screen in a frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process but has not yet completed the derivation start process. The priority means (display CPU 72) within the display range that allows the derivation start processing to be executed for the selected image data in preference to the individual image that is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame. Gaming machine according to feature I1, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S2009 to S2010 in step S2010.

  According to the feature I2, in the configuration including the feature I1 and capable of executing the derivation start process for the image data of the individual image outside the display screen in advance, the display target on the display screen is more than the image data. However, the derivation start process is preferentially executed for the image data corresponding to the individual image that is included in, but has not yet completed the derivation start process. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution timings of the derivation start processing are dispersed as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the individual image that is supposed to be displayed is not displayed.

  Feature I3. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start processing, but is included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frames. When the derivation start process is executed for image data corresponding to a possible individual image, the derivation start is given priority to the image data of the individual image whose timing to be displayed on the display screen is earlier. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, which is provided with a priority means (a function of the display CPU 72 that executes the process of step S2011) outside the display range that causes the process to be executed.

  According to the characteristic I3, when there are a plurality of individual images that are outside the display screen but may be included in the display target in the subsequent frame, the timing of the display target on the display screen is earlier. Since the derivation start processing is executed with priority from the image data of the individual image, it is possible to favorably disperse the processing load.

Feature I4. The deriving unit outputs to the display control unit drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data of an individual image included in an image for one frame and parameter information derived for the image data. An instruction means (function of executing the processing of step S408 in the display CPU 72),
The display control unit is configured to set image data in the setting storage unit according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, and create drawing data for a frame corresponding to the drawing instruction information. ,
Further, when the drawing instruction means outputs the drawing instruction information corresponding to the image for one frame, the derivation start is performed for the image data of the individual image which is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the drawing instruction information is output so as not to include information corresponding to the image data even if the processing is completed.

  According to the feature I4, even if the derivation unit starts derivation of the parameter information in advance, only the image data of the individual image in the display screen is provided to the drawing instruction information output to the display control unit. , Information corresponding to the image data of the individual image outside the display screen is not provided. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of drawing instruction information output to the display control means. Further, the display control unit does not need to determine whether the specified individual image is within the display screen, and even if the determination is not performed, the display control of the individual image outside the display screen is unnecessarily performed. You don't have to.

Feature I5. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed at a predetermined position in the range of the rear image before the rear image, and the rear image corresponds to one frame. Includes a wide range rear image set wider than the display range,
In the wide-area rear image, a display changing unit (a function of executing the process of step S2004 in the display CPU 72) that changes the display range of the one frame to a position different from the display range of the previous frame is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

  According to the feature I5, since the display range for one frame may be changed, it is possible to suppress the uniformization of the display effect and increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, since the derivation start processing is executed in advance for the individual image outside the display screen as well, even if the display range for one frame is switched, It is possible to satisfactorily derive the parameter information of each individual image.

Feature I6. An operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the display changing unit changes the display range of the one frame based on the operation received by the operation receiving unit.

  According to the characteristic I6, the display range for one frame may be changed based on the operation of the operation receiving means by the player, so that the uniformization of the display effect is suppressed and the attention to the image is increased. Is possible. However, in the configuration in which the display range for one frame is changed based on the operation on the operation receiving means, it is difficult to predict the timing when the change occurs. In this case, since the derivation start processing is executed in advance for the individual image outside the display screen as well, even if the display range for one frame is switched, It is possible to satisfactorily derive the parameter information of each individual image.

  Feature I7. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start processing, but is included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frames. The gaming machine according to the feature I5 or I6, characterized in that whether or not there is a possible individual image is determined based on the display range for the one frame at that time.

  According to the feature I7, the individual image that is the start target of the derivation of the parameter information is grasped with reference to the set display range. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the display range for one frame is switched, the distribution of the execution timing of the derivation start process is performed according to the currently set display range, and the distribution can be favorably performed.

Feature I8. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the rear image,
Furthermore, an operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player,
A display changing unit (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the process of step S2004) for changing the content of the back image based on the operation accepted by the operation accepting unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature I8, the content of the rear image may be changed based on the operation of the operation receiving unit by the player, so that the uniform display effect can be suppressed and the attention to the image can be increased. Becomes However, in the configuration in which the content of the rear image is changed based on the operation on the operation receiving unit, it is difficult to predict the timing of the change. In this case, since the derivation start process is executed in advance for the individual image outside the display screen as well, even if the contents of the rear image are switched, each of the features I1 and It is possible to favorably derive the parameter information of the individual image.

  Feature I9. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start processing, but is included in the display target on the display screen in the subsequent frames. The gaming machine according to feature I8, wherein whether or not there is a possible individual image is determined based on the content of the back image at that time.

  According to the feature I9, the individual image that is the target for starting the derivation of the parameter information is grasped on the basis of the content of the set back image. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the content of the back image is switched, the distribution of the execution timing of the derivation start processing is performed according to the content of the back image that is currently set, and the distribution can be favorably performed.

Feature I10. Derivation storage means (work RAM 73) used when deriving the parameter information in the derivation means,
The derivation means for deriving, as the derivation start processing, when there is image data for which derivation of the parameter information should be newly started, the derivation used for deriving the parameter information of the image data. At least a search process (step S2012 in the display CPU 72) for searching a region in the storage unit for storage and a region initialization process (step S2013 in the display CPU 72) for initializing the region secured based on the search result are performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9.

  According to the characteristic I10, in the derivation start process, not only the process of setting the parameter information, but also the process of searching the area used for deriving the parameter information and the area secured based on the search result are initialized. The processing load is larger than that of the update processing. On the other hand, since it is possible to disperse the execution timing of the derivation start processing by providing the configuration of the above characteristic I1, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

  The invention of the characteristic group I is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device is updated in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be performed. Further, when creating the drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and size is performed for each of the individual images that are simultaneously displayed on the display screen, and the drawing data is created based on the operation result.

  In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated increases at the same time. Then, when the processing load locally increases, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features H1 to H11, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Drawing data creating means for creating drawing data in the setting storage means using the image data (function of executing the process of step S1905 in the VDP 76),
Image signal output means (display circuit 94) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen by outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A data adjusting unit (scaler) that adjusts the data size of the drawing data created in the setting storage unit to create adjusted data and causes the image signal output unit to output an image signal according to the adjusted data. 97),
Change effect executing means (a setting process for zoom-in effect in the VDP 76 that causes a size change effect that is at least one of enlargement and reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature J1, the size change effect of the individual image displayed on the display screen is performed by adjusting the data size of the drawing data and changing the adjustment magnification when creating the adjusted data. As a result, the size change effect can be performed while reducing the processing load, as compared with the configuration in which the magnification is individually adjusted for each of the image data set in the setting storage unit. As described above, the size change effect can be favorably executed.

  Features J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein when the drawing data is created in the setting storage unit, the drawing data creating unit creates the drawing data with the same size regardless of which of the adjustment ratios.

  According to the feature J2, the drawing data creating means only needs to create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect and the content thereof, so that while suppressing complication of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data, A size change effect can be performed.

Features J3. An initial adjustment magnification is set as the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means,
In the situation where the initial adjustment magnification is set, the data adjusting means adjusts the image after the adjustment so that an image corresponding to the entire data of the drawing data is displayed in a state adjusted to the resolution of the display screen. The gaming machine described in the feature J1 or J2, which is characterized by creating data.

  According to the feature J3, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described in the feature J1 and the like by using the configuration for performing the resolution adjustment corresponding to the display screen on the created drawing data.

  Features J4. The change effect executing unit changes the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting unit to a magnification for enlargement larger than the initial adjustment magnification, thereby performing the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to feature J3, which is provided with an enlarging execution means (a function of executing the process of step S4101 in the VDP 76) to be executed.

  According to the feature J4, the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image is performed based on the initial adjustment magnification. As a result, the drawing data creating means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect and the content. Therefore, it is possible to perform the size change effect while suppressing the complication of the process related to the creation of the drawing data.

  Features J5. The change effect executing means is smaller than the enlargement magnification within the range from the initial adjustment magnification to the enlargement magnification in a situation in which the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement is being performed by the enlargement executing means. A reduction execution unit (a function for executing the process of step S4101 in the VDP 76) that performs the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing the magnification is provided. Characteristic The game machine described in Characteristic J4.

  According to the feature J5, after the adjustment magnification is set to the predetermined enlargement magnification, it is returned to the initial adjustment magnification side, whereby the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image is performed. As a result, the drawing data creating means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect and the content. Therefore, it is possible to perform the size change effect while suppressing the complication of the process related to the creation of the drawing data.

Features J6. A power source unit (power source and launch control device 57) that is connected to an external power source and supplies operating power required in the gaming machine;
Initial setting means (a function of executing the process of step S305 in the display CPU 72) for setting the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means to the initial adjustment magnification based on the start of the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5, characterized in that

  According to the feature J6, in the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means, for example, when the power ON operation of the gaming machine is performed and the supply of operating power from the power supply unit is started. In addition, the adjustment magnification is set to the initial adjustment magnification. As a result, the initial adjustment magnification can be set satisfactorily.

  Features J7. Magnification return means (enlargement flag in VDP 76) for returning to the initial adjustment magnification after the end of the size change effect when the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means is changed from the initial adjustment magnification for performing the size change effect. The game machine according to any one of features J3 to J6.

  According to feature J7, it is possible to display an image according to the resolution of the display screen after the end of the size change effect.

  Features J8. The data adjusting means creates the adjusted data based on performing linear interpolation processing (processing of steps S4202 and S4206 in the display circuit 94) on the drawing data. The game machine described in any one of J7.

  According to the feature J8, the excellent effects as described in the feature J1 and the like can be obtained by using the linear interpolation processing.

  Features J9. The change effect executing means specifies the specific individual image among the plurality of individual images included in the image for one frame when the size change effect is performed so that the entire individual image is included in the display screen. The individual image of the individual image is provided with an individual adjusting unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S4008 to S4012 in the display CPU 72) for adjusting the parameter information when the drawing data creating unit sets the image data in the setting storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8.

  In the configuration that performs the size change effect by changing the magnification of the drawing data, it is assumed that the size of a specific individual image that you want to display in its entirety is changed and part of it is placed outside the display screen. To be done. On the other hand, according to the feature J9, the parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit is adjusted so that the entire specific individual image is included in the display screen. To be done. As a result, it is possible to display the entire specific individual image on the display screen while achieving the effect described in the above feature J1 and the like.

  Features J10. The change effect execution unit is configured such that a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in an image for one frame when the size change effect is performed corresponds to one frame when the size change effect is not performed. An individual that adjusts parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data creating unit so that it becomes similar to at least one of the size and position displayed in the image. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, which is provided with an adjusting unit (a function of the display CPU 72 to execute the processes of steps S4008 to S4012).

  In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size change is performed even for a specific individual image that at least one of the size and the position is not changed, and the element that is not changed is changed. It is assumed that it will end up. On the other hand, according to the feature J10, the image data of the specific individual image is stored for setting so that at least one of the size and the position of the specific individual image is similar to the case where the size change effect is not performed. The parameter information when adjusted to the means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the elements that are not desired to be changed for the specific individual image, while achieving the effects as described in the feature J1 and the like.

  Feature J11. The change effect execution unit is configured such that a specific individual image of a plurality of individual images included in an image for one frame when the size change effect is performed corresponds to one frame immediately before the size change effect is started. An individual that adjusts size and coordinate information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data creating unit so that it becomes similar to the size and position displayed in the image. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, which is provided with an adjusting unit (a function of the display CPU 72 to execute the processes of steps S4008 to S4012).

  In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size and position of even a specific individual image that is desired to be the same as the image for one frame immediately before the size change effect is started. It is expected that changes will be made. On the other hand, according to the feature J11, the image data of the specific individual image is set such that the specific individual image has the same size and position as the image for one frame immediately before the start of the size change effect. The size and coordinate information when set in the setting storage means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the display mode for the specific individual image while achieving the effects described in the above feature J1 and the like.

Features J12. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which the variable individual image is variably displayed before the rear image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J9 to J11, wherein the specific individual image is the variation individual image.

  According to the feature J12, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the changing individual image from changing with the size change effect.

Features J13. As a display effect, a reach effect is included in which an image for reach is displayed in a state in which an individual image for reach is displayed in standby.
The gaming machine according to feature J12, wherein the specific individual image is the standby individual image for the reach.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the individual image for reach from fluctuating due to the size change effect.

  The invention of the characteristic J group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, it is considered that the display effect can be diversified by performing the display effect of enlarging or reducing the image for one frame. However, it is not preferable that the processing load is increased and the processing omission occurs due to the display effect, and on the other hand, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally reduced to perform the display effect. If measures are taken to simplify such display contents, it becomes impossible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the display effect.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features H1 to H11, the above features I1 to I10, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L14. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
A display storage unit (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores a plurality of types of compressed moving image data used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means,
Expansion means (moving picture decoder 93) for expanding any of the moving image data in the expansion area and creating still image data for a plurality of frames for the image corresponding to the moving image data,
By using the still image data for a plurality of frames expanded by the expanding means in the frame order defined in the moving image data, a moving image of an image corresponding to the moving image data is displayed for the plurality of frames. A moving image display executing means (a function of executing setting processing for moving images in the VDP 76) for displaying the entire image,
Of the plurality of types of moving image data, the second moving image data (moving image data PD55 after branching) is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data (moving image data PD54 before branching) is displayed. A plurality of moving image effect executing means (function of executing arithmetic processing for moving image in the display CPU 72) for performing a group of display effects having a display period in which a moving image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the characteristic K1, a group of display effects are performed using at least the first moving image data and the second moving image data, instead of using a single moving image data. As a result, for example, the first moving image data or the second moving image data can be commonly used to perform other display effects, and the moving image data can be individually used for each display effect. The storage capacity required to store moving image data can be reduced compared to the set configuration. Further, for example, at the start of the group of display effects, the processing for expansion is executed on the first moving image data, and the second moving image is displayed during the period in which the moving image display based on the first moving image data is being performed. It is possible to execute a process for expanding the data. In this case, the processing load when starting the above-described group of display effects can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development of both moving image data is performed collectively.

  From the above, it is possible to favorably perform the display effect using the moving image data.

  Features K2. The feature K1 is characterized in that the display control means includes means for performing a group of display effects by using one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data. Game machine.

  According to the characteristic K2, either one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is commonly used to perform another display effect. As a result, the storage capacity required to store the moving image data can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is individually set for each display effect.

  Features K3. The moving image based on the first moving image data corresponds to a series of display effects, and the moving image based on the second moving image data is a continuous display effect to the series of displaying effects based on the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, which is compatible with

  According to the characteristic K3, since the first moving image data independently corresponds to the series of display effects, it is possible to perform the display effect using only the first moving image data. In this case, by separately preparing the first moving image data and the second moving image data, a single moving image data that is a combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is prepared in advance. It is possible to perform a plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required to store the moving image data, as compared with a configuration in which the first moving image data is prepared separately from the above. Become.

  Features K4. When the group of display effects are performed by the plurality of moving image effect executing units, the expanding unit performs an expanding process on the second moving image data during a period in which moving images are displayed by the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, which is characterized by being executed.

  According to the characteristic K4, the expansion process is performed on the second moving image data by using the period during which the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. As a result, the processing load when starting the display effect of the group is suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development processing is collectively performed on both moving image data at the start of the display effect of the group.

Features K5. The plural moving image effect executing means,
A first moving image effect executing means for displaying a moving image based on the first moving image data (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S4313 to S4315);
Second moving image effect executing means for displaying a moving image based on the second moving image data after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed (a function of executing steps S4317 to S4319 in the display CPU 72);
Third moving image effect executing means for displaying a moving image based on the third moving image data (moving image data PD56 for B after branching) after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed (step S4320 to step in display CPU 72) A function of executing the processing of S4322),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4, which is characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic K5, it is possible to commonly use the first moving image data in each of the display effect using the second moving image data and the display effect using the third moving image data. Thereby, single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the second moving image data are collected, and single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the third moving image data are collected It is possible to perform a plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required to store the moving image data, as compared with a configuration in which each is separately prepared.

Features K6. An operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The plural moving image effect executing means is based on that the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means during a period during which a moving image is displayed by the first moving image data or at a timing after the moving image display is completed. And a production distribution means (a function of executing the process of step S4308 in the display CPU 72) for setting the subsequent production execution target to the second moving image production execution means or the third moving image production execution means. The gaming machine described in K5.

  In a configuration in which a previously executed moving image display is branched to a predetermined moving image display or a different moving image display based on an arbitrary operation by the player, the occurrence itself of the operation is arbitrary. One moving image data cannot be used. On the other hand, according to the feature K6, the first moving image data is prepared for the moving image display executed first, and the second moving image data and the third moving image data are prepared for the moving image display executed after the branch. The moving image data of is prepared. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the content of the moving image display of the development destination is changed in the middle of the moving image display based on an arbitrary operation by the player.

  Features K7. When the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, the expanding means outputs the first moving image. The characteristic K6 is characterized in that the expansion processing is executed only on the first moving image data of the first to third moving image data before the start timing of displaying the moving image by the data. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic K7, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects is suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development processing is collectively performed on each moving image data at the start of the group of display effects.

  Features K8. The effect apportioning unit is configured to cause the operation accepting unit to perform the determination by the operation receiving unit at a determination timing that is in the middle of displaying a moving image based on the first moving image data and is before the end timing by the number of determination frames. When it is specified that the operation is accepted, the effect execution target after the moving image display by the first moving image data is set to the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means. The gaming machine according to the feature K6 or K7, which is characterized by being present.

  According to the characteristic K8, since the moving image data of the distribution destination is determined before the timing when the moving image display by the first moving image data ends, the moving image display by the first moving image data is performed. In the period, the period for performing the expansion processing on the moving image data of the allocation destination is secured. As a result, a new moving image display is smoothly started after the moving image display based on the first moving image data is finished.

  Features K9. When the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, the expanding means changes from the determination timing to The gaming machine according to Feature K8, wherein the rendering process is performed on the moving image data at the distribution destination in the period until the end timing of the moving image display by the first moving image data.

  According to the characteristic K9, the expansion process is performed only on the moving image data of the distribution destination among the second moving image data and the third moving image data. As a result, the processing load of the expansion processing can be suppressed and the storage capacity required in the expansion area can be reduced.

  The invention of the characteristic group K is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a configuration including moving image data as image data is also known. Since the moving image data has a larger data capacity than the still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in the memory for image data. Therefore, when the moving image data is used, the moving image data is expanded into a predetermined memory area using a decoder into a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are previously updated at each image update timing. It is necessary to use them in a defined order.

  Here, since the moving image data compressed as described above needs to be decoded and used, there is a restriction in its use, and accordingly, a restriction for diversifying display effects using moving image display. Also occurs. On the other hand, a configuration in which it is stored as a collection of still image data without compression is conceivable, but in this case, the storage capacity of the memory for image data is extremely increased.

  Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features H1 to H11, the above features I1 to I10, the above features J1 to J13, and the features limited to any one of the following features L1 to L14 are applied. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance;
A game machine comprising: display control means for creating drawing data in the setting storage means based on the image data and displaying an image on the display screen based on the drawing data in a predetermined update period. hand,
The display control means,
A specific setting data creating unit (a function of executing steps S1603 and S1609 in the VDP 135) that creates specific setting data (background drawing data) based on the image data using a plurality of update periods; ,
Specific setting means (function for executing the process of step S1612 in the VDP 135) for creating the drawing data based on setting the created specific setting data in the setting storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature L1, the specific setting data is created using a plurality of update periods. As a result, since it is possible to secure a long update period for the specific setting data, the disadvantage that the creation of the specific setting data cannot be completed and the image display based on the specific setting data is not appropriately performed may occur. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the process of creating the specific setting data is not completed in one update period, there is a margin in time for the process of creating the drawing data that is performed in the one update period, and the creation of the drawing data is preferably performed. be able to.

Feature L2. The specific setting means,
In the update period in which the creation of the specific setting data is completed, the specific setting data is set in the setting storage means,
During the update period when the creation of the specific setting data is not completed, another setting data different from the specific setting data being created is set in the setting storage means (NO in step S1607 in VDP135). The function of executing the processing of step S1612 in the case of determination)).

  According to the feature L2, the image based on the specific setting data is displayed in the update period in which the creation of the specific setting data is completed, and the drawing data is displayed in the update period in the update period in which the creation of the specific setting data is not completed. The data based on the image data based on the image data that does not require a lot of time for the creation processing capable of completing the creation, and the image based on the different setting data such as the already created data is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that nothing is displayed in the portion where the image based on the specific setting data should be displayed or that the image based on the specific setting data that is being created is displayed.

Feature L3. The specific setting data storage unit (the buffer 302 for creating background) for storing the specific setting data is provided, and the specific setting data creating unit completes the creation each time the creation of the specific setting data is completed. The specific setting data is stored in the specific setting data storage means,
The separate setting data is the specific setting data stored in the specific setting data storage means after the creation is completed before the start of the specific setting data being created by the specific setting data creating means. In addition, the gaming machine according to the feature L2, which is the specific setting data that has been created at the latest timing.

  According to the feature L3, in the update period in which the update of the specific setting data is not completed, the image is displayed using another specific setting data already created in the previous update period. In the update period in which the update of the specific setting data is not completed, it is preferable that the image based on the specific setting data is displayed instead of the image based on the specific setting data. In this respect, the specific setting data and the specific setting data created in the previous update period are created separately, but since both are created using multiple update periods, these specific setting data The data can be expected to be the same or similar. Therefore, by displaying an image using the specific setting data created in the previous update period in the current update period, it is possible to increase the possibility that an image close to the image that is preferable to be originally displayed is displayed. Become.

  In addition, since the image is displayed using the specific setting data that has been created at the latest timing, it is possible to display an image that is highly related to the image in the previous update period and that does not cause a feeling of strangeness.

  Feature L4. The specific setting means depths the specific setting data and setting data (drawing data for effect, drawing data for design) updated at each of the predetermined update periods based on the image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the drawing data is created by setting the drawing data so as to be overlapped in a direction.

  According to the feature L4, the drawing data is created by overlapping the setting data updated for each updating period and the specific setting data created by using the plurality of updating periods, and the image is displayed based on the drawing data. Can be made. The image based on the setting data can be displayed smoothly because the setting data is updated at each update period, and the image based on the specific setting data can be displayed in a plurality of update periods. Since it is created using, it can be displayed with a small processing load. The processing load is reduced by using the setting data for the image that the player's attention is high or the motion is large, and the specific setting data for the image that the player's attention is low or the motion is small. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a display with less discomfort for the player.

  Feature L5. Feature L4 is characterized in that the specific setting means sets the specific setting data at a position deeper than the setting data updated for each of the predetermined update periods based on the image data. Amusement machine.

  According to the feature L5, the image displayed on the back side, which is difficult for the player to gaze, is displayed based on the specific setting data, and the image displayed on the front side, which is easily watched by the player, is updated every update period. Since the display is performed based on the setting data, it is possible to perform the display with less discomfort for the player.

  Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the number of update periods used for creating the specific setting data is constant.

  According to the feature L6, since the number of update periods required to create the specific setting data is constant, the display is performed based on the latest specific setting data created at a constant cycle. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the operation of the display image becomes unnatural due to the deviation of the creation cycle, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the specific setting data is created based on image data for displaying an image for a background.

  According to the feature L7, the specific setting data is created based on the background image data and the background image is displayed based on the specific setting data. However, the background image may be less noticeable to the player. It is possible to obtain the effect as described above while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature L8. The display control means,
A normal setting unit that creates the drawing data in the setting storage unit based on the image data without using the specific setting data for each update period,
In the first period which is the continuous update period, the target for creating the drawing data in the setting storage unit is the normal setting unit, and the second update period is the continuous update period different from the first period. The target is a plurality of setting means including the specific setting means for the period (the function of executing the processing of step S1501, step S1503, and step S1510 in the display CPU 131, step S1602, step S1603, and steps S1606 to S1609 in the VDP 135). The game machine according to any one of the features L1 to L7, which is characterized in that it performs a process).

  According to the feature L8, the image display using the specific setting data is performed in the second period of the update period, and the image display is performed in the first period without using the specific setting data. As a result, during the update period in which the load of the display processing becomes relatively large by displaying a large number of characters or a character having a large data volume, the display using the specific setting data is performed. During the update period when the load is small, the image display can be performed without using the specific setting data, and the image display can be appropriately performed while balancing the display content and the processing load.

Feature L9. In a predetermined update period, the image data of the object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the viewpoint is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the image data of the object is set in the projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Storage means for storing the generated data for one update period generated by the generation means for projecting and generating generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane for a plurality of update periods;
Display control means for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The generating means is
A gaming machine comprising a specific generation unit that generates specific generation data based on the image data using a plurality of the update periods.

  According to the feature L9, the specific generation data of the three-dimensional information, which has a larger processing load than the generation of the specific setting data of the two-dimensional information, is generated in advance in the previous update period, and the subsequent specific generation data is generated. It can be used during the renewal period when is not completed. Therefore, when displaying an image in the update period, it is not necessary to perform geometry calculation or rendering for the specific generated data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature L10. The generation means creates a plurality of projection data for each predetermined combination of the images for the one update period at a predetermined update timing, and sets the plurality of projection data in the setting storage means. Is a configuration for creating the drawing data based on
Feature L9 is characterized in that the specific generation means creates a part of the projection data among the plurality of projection data as the specific generation data by using the plurality of update periods. Amusement machine.

  According to the feature L10, of the image data used for creating the drawing data, projection data is created for a part of the image data using a plurality of update periods, and other image data is projected for each update period. Create the data. In this case, processing load is created by using multiple update periods for image data that is relatively inconspicuous when an image is displayed, and for each image period that is relatively noticeable. It is possible to reduce the processing load while displaying the image data of the three-dimensional information having a large size and to display the image without a feeling of strangeness.

  Feature L11. The gaming machine according to feature L9 or L10, wherein the number of times of the update period used to generate the specific generation data is constant.

  According to the feature L11, since the number of update periods required to create the specific generated data is constant, the display is performed based on the specific generated data most recently created in a constant cycle. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem that the operation of the display image becomes unnatural due to the uneven generation cycle, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature L12. The gaming machine according to any one of features L9 to L11, wherein the specific generation data is created based on image data for displaying an image for a background.

  According to the feature L12, the specific generation data is created based on the image data for the background, and the background image is displayed based on the specific generation data. However, the background image may be less noticeable to the player. It is high, and while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it is possible to achieve the effects as already described.

Feature L13. The generating means is
A normal generating unit that generates the generated data without generating the specific generated data for each update period,
In the first period which is the continuous update period, the target for generating the generated data is the normal generation unit, and in the second period which is the continuous update period different from the first period, the target is the target. The game machine according to any one of the features L9 to L12, characterized in that the game machine is a generation means including a specific generation means.

  According to the feature L13, the image display using the specific generation data is performed in the second period of the update period, and the image display is performed in the first period without using the specific generation data. As a result, during the update period when the load of the display processing becomes relatively large by displaying a large number of characters or a character with a large data capacity, the display using the specific generated data is performed, and the load is increased. During the update period when becomes smaller, the image display can be performed without using the specific generated data, and the image display can be appropriately performed while balancing the display content and the processing load.

Feature L14. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance;
A game machine comprising: display control means for creating drawing data in the setting storage means based on the image data and displaying an image on the display screen based on the drawing data in a predetermined update period. hand,
The display control means,
Specific setting data creating means for creating specific setting data (background drawing data) based on the image data for each of the plurality of update periods;
Specific setting means for creating the drawing data based on setting the specific setting data, which has been created, in the setting storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

  According to the feature L14, the specific setting data is created for each of a plurality of update periods. As a result, the processing load for the creation process is reduced during the update period in which the specific setting data is not created, and it is possible to perform other processes using the reduced amount.

  The invention of the characteristic L group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory ( See, for example, Patent Document 1).

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

  Here, it is considered that the display effect can be diversified by performing the display effect by displaying a large number of images or a three-dimensional image having a large number of polygons. However, it is not preferable that the processing load is increased and the processing omission occurs due to the display effect, and on the other hand, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally reduced to perform the display effect. If measures are taken to simplify such display contents, it becomes impossible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the display effect.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L14, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features H1 to H11, the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J13, and the features K1 to K9. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

  Below, the basic configuration of various game machines to which the above respective features can be applied is shown.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

  Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means Then, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

  10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 48 ... Operating device for production as operation receiving means, 50 ... Main control device as upstream control means, 53 ... ROM, 70 ... Display control device, 72 ... Display CPU , 73 ... Work RAM, 74 ... Memory module, 76 ... VDP, 81c ... Composite data area as grouping storage area, 82a, 82b ... Frame area as setting storage means, 93 ... Video decoder as expanding means , 94 ... Display circuit, 97 ... Scaler as data adjusting means, 101 ... Controller, 102 ... NAND flash memory, 111 ... I / F, 113 ... Controller CPU as managing means, 114 ... Control as management information storing means ROM 117, cache memory as storage means, 119 ... boot memory, 13 ... display CPU, 132 ... work RAM, 133 ... memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142a, 142b ... frame area as setting storage means, 143 ... Z buffer as comparison storage means, 145 ... as grouping storage area Mode buffer, 155 ... Display circuit, 161 ... Controller, 162 ... NAND flash memory, 171 ... I / F, 173 ... Controller CPU as management means, 174 ... Control ROM as management information storage means, 177 ... Cache memory as storage means, 179 ... Boot memory, 302 ... Background creation buffer, CH5 ... Smooth movement sprite, G ... Display screen, PA1 ... Overlap area, PC35, PC36 ... Linked object, PD2 to PD10 … Divided parts data, PD12 to PD 5 ... Divided data group, PD19 ... Partial addition data as transparent value adjustment data, PD22 to PD25 ... Partial alpha data, PD26, PD27 ... Design sprite data, PD30 to PD33 ... Partial alpha data, PD37, PD38 ... Partial alpha data, PD48, PD49 ... Sprite data, PD54 to PD56 ... Moving image data, PL5 ... Partial display area.

Claims (2)

Display means having a display screen in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Based on setting the image data in the setting storage unit having a large number of unit setting areas to create drawing data in the setting storage unit and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display unit. Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
Each unit setting area has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value,
A configuration in which the image signal is output by the display control unit so that a brighter color is displayed in a dot corresponding to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical value information,
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen;
Addition processing execution means for executing addition processing for adding numerical information corresponding to respective unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images,
Setting processing execution means for setting the data of the result of the addition processing to a unit setting area corresponding to each of the unit image data overlapping each other in the setting storage means,
Of the back side individual image and the front side individual image displayed so as to be overlapped in the depth direction, numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to a portion overlapping with the front side individual image in the back side individual image is reduced, A reflection reducing unit that does not perform the reduction on the unit image data corresponding to a portion that does not overlap the front side individual image in the back side individual image,
Is equipped with
The reflection reducing unit applies predetermined information corresponding to reducing the numerical information at a predetermined reduction rate to the unit image data of the back side individual image corresponding to a portion overlapping with the front side individual image. Therefore, a unit for reducing the numerical information of the unit image data is provided ,
When the reduction is performed on the back side individual image that overlaps with the front side individual image, it is possible to set the reduction rate separately for each of the unit setting areas of the overlapped portion. gaming machine characterized in that is.   The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.